canon EOSR ® Advanced User Guide (PDF file) and software can be downloaded from the Canon Web site (p.4, 194). www.canon.
Introduction Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the "Safety Instructions" (p.21-23) and "Handling Precautions" (p.24-26). Also, read this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly. Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the Camera While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come out. You can then better understand the camera.
Item Check List Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer. Camera (with eyecup and body cap) Battery Pack LP-E6N (with protective cover) Battery Charger LC-E6/LC-E6E* ,--------~--~-----~---~ I I 1 Strap Interface Cable Cable Protector * Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a • • • • power cord.) The camera does not come with a memory card (p.10) or HDMI cable.
Instruction Manuals D The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions. The Advanced User Guide (this PDF file), which provides complete instructions, can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or other device. The Advanced User Guide and instruction manuals for lenses and software (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or other device.
Instruction Manuals DownloadJng the Advanced User Gulde/lnatructlon Manuale Uelng QR Code I The Advanced User Guide and instruction manuals for lenses and software (PDF files) can be downloaded to a smartphone or tablet using the QR code. ► www.canon.com/icpd ca) • A software application is required to read the QR code. • Select your country or region of residence, then download the Advanced User Gulde/Instruction Manuals.
Quick Start Guide Insert the battery (p.39). 1 • Upon purchase, charge the battery to start using (p.36). Insert the card (p.40). 2 • With the card's label facing toward the back of the camera, insert it into the card slot. Attach the lens (p.46). 3 ,, 4 s • Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the camera to attach the lens. • Make sure the lens's focus mode switch is set to (p.46). Set the power switch to (p.44). Flip out the screen (p.43).
Quick Start Guide 6 Set the shooting mode to [C1t] I (p.aa). • Press the button and turn the dial to select UY], then press . • All the necessary camera settings will be set automatically. 7 Focus on the subject (p.52}. 8 Take the picture (p.52). 9 Review the picture. • <: :> (an AF point) appears over any face detected. • Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the subject. • Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
About This Manual Chapters 2-7 correspond to the functions in camera menus. Icons in this Manuaf : Indicates the Mode button. : Indicates the Main dial. <~> : Indicates the Quick control dial. < ! >< T >< ◄ >< ► > : Indicates the corresponding direction on the < ❖ > < ~· cross keys. : Indicates the < M-Fn > Multi-function bar. : Indicates the lens control ring. : Indicates the Setting button.
About This Manual • Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to and no controls are locked with the Multi-function lock (p.44, 56). • It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults. • The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the RF24-105mm F4 LIS USM lens as an example. • The sample photos used in this manual are for instructional purposes only.
Compatible Cards The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera (p.157). • SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards * UHS-11 and UHS-I cards supported. When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with good enough performances (fast enough writing and reading speeds) to handle the movie recording quality.
Chapters Introduction 2 I 1 Preparation and Basic Operations 35 I l Shooting 65 I 3 AF 119 I 4 Playback 143 I 5 Set-up 153 I 6 Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication} Functions 169 I 7 Custom Functions / My Menu 1a5 I 8 Reference 193 I 11
Contents Introduction 2 Item Check List .......................................................................... 3 Instruction Manuals ................................................................... 4 Quick Start Guide ...................................................................... 6 About This Manual .................................................................... 8 Compatible Cards .................................................................... 10 Chapters..........................
Contents E!) Quick Control ..................................................................... 64 2 I Shooting 65 ----------------···--- ~-1 Shooting Still Photos 66 Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting ............................................. 67 Setting Image Quality .............................................................. 70 Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio ................................................ 72 ISO : Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos ............................
Contents M: Manual Exposure .............................................................. 96 Fv : Flexible-Priority AE ........................................................... 97 Qi Selecting the Drive Mode .................................................. 99 ~ Using the Self-Timer ........................................................ 101 ~ Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation .................. 102 ~ Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ....................................
Contents k 143 Tab Menus: Playback ............................................................ 144 [El Image Playback .............................................................. 145 ~ Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) ........................... 148 '9' Playing Back Movies ....................................................... 149 "@ Erasing Images ................................................................ 151 5 Set-up 153 Tab Menus: Set-up .........................................
Contents 6 Wi-Fi (Wireltss Communicatien} Funcijob, 169 What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions .................................... 170 Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi. ................................. 172 Reconnecting via Wi-Fi ......................................................... 183 7 Custom Functions I My Menu 185 Tab Menus: Customization .................................................... 186 Customizing the M-Fn (Multi-Function) Bar...........................
Index to Features • Charging the battery -+ p.36 • Dloptric adjustment .. p.50 • Battery level -+ p.45 • Information display In viewfinder -+ IPDFI • Viewfinder vertical display -+ lPDFI • Viewfinder display format -+ lPDFI • Vari-angle .. p.43 • Touch control .. p.63 • Color tone • IPDFI • Brightness .. p.160 • Display settings • Electronic level .. IPDFI .. !PDFI • Help .. p.166 • AF operation .. p.126 • AF method .. p.128 • AF point selection .. p.134 • AF frame size ..
Index to Features Shooting Metering • Metering mode .. !PDFI Drive .. p.99 • Self-timer .. p.101 • Silent LV shooting • Silent shooting .. IPDFI .. IPDFI • Maximum burst .. p.71 • File numbering .. p.66 • HDR mode • Pairing .. !PDFI .. IPDFI .. IPDFI .. IPDFI .. IPDFI .. !PDFI .. IPDFI • Quick Control .. p.64 • Touch Shutter .. p.92 • Magnified view .. IPDFI .. IPDF! • Multiple exposures • Drive mode • Creating/Selecting a folder • Shooting mode .. !PDF! ..
Index to Features • Attenuator • External flash • Flash exposure compensation .. p.105 • Time code • Auto slow shutter .. p.105 .. p.105 • FE lock • Flash function settings .. IPDFI • Flash Custom Function settings .. IPDFI IPDF! .. !PDF! .. IPDF! .. IPDFI .. IPDF! .. • Av 1/8-stop increments • HDMI output • Remote control shooting .S:...•,, C - ,. '-' 1 ..:. . .. ' ..- ' ·,. -- ~ .. - ' - - ' • Image review time .. p.87 • Autoexposure shooting .. p.114 • Single-image display .. p.
Index to Features lmqeEdltlng IPDFI .. IPDFI _ _-+ IPDFI • RAW image processing .. • Resizing JPEGs • Cropping JPEGs Image Transfer/Print Order • Image transfer to a computer/FTP server • Print order (DPOF) • Photobook Set-up Customlzati9fl IPDFI My Menu .. IPDF! Custom shooting mode .. IPDFI • Sensor cleaning .. p.165 • Appending Dust Delete Data .. IPDF! • Manual sensor cleaning Software • Downloading and Installing .. p.194 • Software Instruction Manuals .. p.195 20 .. p.
Safety Instructions Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely. Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the product or others. I ~ WARNING: Denotes the risk of serious injury or death. • Keep the product out of the reach of young children. A strap wrapped around a person's neck may result in strangulation. The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
Safety Instructions • Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter. • Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a dry cloth. • Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands. • Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet. • Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
Safety Instructions ~CAUTION: Denotes the risk of injury. • Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes. • Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong impacts. • Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it. This may cause injury or damage to the product. • Flash emits high temperatures when fired.
Handling Precautions Camera Care • This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock. • The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. • To maximize the camera's dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly closed.
Handling Precautions • Do not block shutter curtain operation with your finger or other objects. Doing so may cause a malfunction. • Use only a commercially available blower to blow away dust when it adheres to the lens, viewfinder, etc. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center. • Do not touch the camera's electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding.
Handling Precautions Screen, Viewfinder, and LCD Panel • Although the screen and viewfinder are manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01 °/c, or fewer of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded. • If the screen and viewfinder are left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed.
Part Names (1 ) - - - - - - , . - - - - - - - - (12) (2)-----, ~~~ ~~:5:::=------ (13) (14) 1.-..~_,,.,, (3 ) - -~...,.-.;:: ~::;;,a ,....,,...,......,___ _ _ _ (4 )-+-✓.~ ~ r ; a , - r - - - - (16) (S )---1k-'t\.~ (6) -+------:----+--' (7)---1~---r----t---- I I (15) ~ ~ - - - (17) Jl1ffl--e--o::::::--""'d ~~c:a....~.,...____ (18) ._..;;::~~~....,~-- (19) (8)---1t--11 .
Part Names (6) (1) (2) (7) (3) (8) (4) (9) (5) (10) I I I (15) (11) I I (16) (12) I I (17) I : (18) I (13) (19) (14) (1) Eyecup (11) Info button (2) Viewfinder eyepiece , (12) Access lamp (3) Dioptric adjustment knob (4) Power switch (13) <[!I/SET> Quick Control/Setting button (5) (6) Terminal cover (14) LCD panel (15) < jl > Remote control terminal (7) Multi-function lock button < ~ > Quick control dial < ~~ > AF start button (16) < ~ > Digital terminal
Part Names r-------- (8) (9) ~---... I r----(10) ~~~- (11) .. · .. . .• •' . i/.·' ~- tr=· . !'" ·· . "' .,:_. i :{.:: ., ' ' . :1 \. (1) (2)-(3) _ _____. . . .~ : (4) - - - - (14.) .. . (13) (5)-----.(15) -.. · . (6)-----_(1§) ··. (7) _ _ __ __ ____, .
Part Names LC'DPanel Sample display Fv 2000 (@J~FS.6¼ Information displayed varies depending on camera status. -3_ .2..1..':!..1..2.4:3 I omo+ AUTO ltdtB ISO Sample display Information displayed varies depending on camera status.
Part Names Battery Charger LC-E6 Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.36). (1) Battery pack slot ...........- (3) (2) Charge lamp (3) Power plug I Battery Charger LC-E6E Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.36).
Part Names Pass the end of the strap through the camera's strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap's buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.
Part Names ·uifn . ,. , .:.I.'':ffi. •.;·ca11e. "·.·- :, . . Protflctor· ,, , .•........ , When connecting the camera to a computer, use the included interface cable or a genuine Canon cable. When connecting the interface cable, also use the included cable protector. Using the cable protector helps prevent accidental disconnection and terminal damage.
Part Names Using an Optional Canon Interface Cable When using a genuine Canon interface cable (sold separately), run the cable through the clamp (5) as shown before attaching the clamp to the cable protector. (5) 0 • The digital terminal may be damaged if the interface cable is connected without the cable protector. , • Make sure the interface cable is securely connected to t~E! digital terminal. [j] 34 HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended when connecting the camera to a television.
Preparation a,nd Basic Operations . This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera operations.
Charging the Battery 1 Detach the protective cover provided with the battery. l LC-E6 -------. . - - - - - - LC-E6E 36 Fully insert the battery in the charger. • Do the opposite to remove the battery. 3 Recharge the battery. For LC-E6 • As shown by the arrow, flip out the battery charger's prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet. For LC-E6E • Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power outlet. ► Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Charging the Battery Charge Level Charge Lamp Color 0-49% 50-74% Blinks once per second Orange 75% or higher Fully charged Display Green Blinks twice per second Blinks three times per second Turned on • It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery's remaining capacity.
Charging the Battery • Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged. Charge the battery before use. • Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used. Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity. • After recharging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet. • You can attach the protective cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery is recharged or not.
Inserting/Removing the Battery Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera. 1 Slide the battery compartment I cover lock and open the cover. 2 Insert the battery. • Insert the end with the electrical contacts. • Insert the battery until it locks in place. 3 Close the cover. • Press the cover until it snaps shut. D You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E6N or LP-E6. Open the cover and remove the battery.
Inserting and Removing the Card The captured images are recorded onto the card. D Make sure the card's write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable writing and erasing. 1 Slide the cover to open it. (1) ~:==----r--r-----;~::;::~ l Insert the card. • As shown by the illustration, face the card's label side toward you and insert it until it clicks in place. 3 Close the cover. • Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrow until it snaps shut.
Inserting and Removing the Card 1 Open the cover. • Set the power switch to . • Check that the access lamp (1) is off, then open the cover. • If [Saving ...] is displayed on the screen, close the cover. (1) l Remove the card. • Gently push in the card, then let it go to eject. • Pull the card straight out, then close the cover. -'~•1.\11!•9 --~:: ~""' If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera (p.157).
Inserting and Removing the Card D • When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transfetred.' Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera. • Removing the card. • Removing the battery. • Shaking or striking the camera.
Using the Screen You can change the direction and angle of the screen. Flip out the screen. I Rotate the screen. • When the screen is swung out, you can rotate it up, down, or over 180° to face the subject. • The indicated angle is only approximate. Face it toward you. • Normally, use the camera with the screen facing you. 0 • Be careful not to forcefully rotate the screen, putting much power on the rotating axis (hinge).
Turning on the Power • Turns the camera on, accompanied by the sound of the shutter curtain opening. Also accompanied by the sound of the aperture opening, when an RF lens is attached. • Stops camera operation, accompanied by the sound of the shutter curtain closing. Set the power switch to this position when not using the camera. Also accompanied by the sound of the aperture closing, when an RF lens is attached.
Turning on the Power When the power switch is set to , the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon < -p~ > indicates that the battery will soon be exhausted. Fv 2000 ~lE33F5.6¼ 100-70 69-50 49-20 -3_ .2..1. .fD••1..2:•:3 I !jjiJI OfJD ISO D+ AUTO I . --1-:_-~-~---1....---~ ~-'~-i-----~-~-'~---1 9----_: 0 • Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster: • Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
Attaching and Detaching a Lens Remove the caps. • Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows. l Attach the lens. • Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place. 3 Set the lens's focus mode switch to . AF11MF (1[]) • stands for autofocus. • stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate. 4 Remove the front lens cap.
Attaching and Detaching a Lens While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow. • Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. • Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens. • Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision. • When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera's power switch to . • If the front part (focusing rtng) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount Adapter EF-EOS R. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses. Attaching a Lens Remove the caps. • Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows. (1) (2) .---------- l Attach the lens to the adapter. • Align the red or white mount index on the lens with the corresponding mount index on the adapter and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses 4 Set the lens's focus mode switch to ' . • stands for autofocus. • stands for manual focus. AF11MF mm Autofocus will not operate. I 5 Remove the front lens cap. ,,--,--.=...,.-~~~~~/-----~----1 While pressing the lens release button, turn the adapter as shown by the arrow. • Turn the adapter until it stops, then detach it. l Detach the lens from the adapter. • Hold down the lens release lever on the adapter and turn the lens counterclockwise.
Using the Viewfinder Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display to either the screen or viewfinder. Turn the dioptric adjustment knob. • Turn the knob left or right to make the viewfinder display look sharp. 0 • The viewfinder display and camera screen cannot be activated at the same time. • At some aspect ratios, black bars are displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the screen. These areas are not recorded.
• Viewing the Screen as You Shoot As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see page 43. Normal angle Low angle I High angle • Shooting Through the Viewfinder To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake. Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting 1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly. 2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand. 3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button. 4.
Basic Operations The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely. Pressing Halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture. The exposure setting (shutter speed and aperture) is displayed on the screen, in the viewfinder, or on the LCD panel for approx. 8 sec. or as set for the metering timer.* * By default, the metering timer is set to 8 sec.
Basic Operations You can set the shooting mode. Press the button, turn the dial, then select the shooting mode. To switch between shooting still photos and movies, press the button and then the button. Has the same effect as pressing the shutter button halfway in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or [BULB] shooting mode. By pressing the < M-Fn > button and turning the < O > dial, you can set the ISO speed, drive mode, AF operation, white balance, and flash exposure compensation.
Basic Operations <~> Main Dial (1) After pressing a button, turn the <~ > dial. Press a button such as or , then turn the dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shootingready state. (2) Turn only the< ~ > dial. While looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel, turn the dial. Use this dial to set the shutter speed, aperture, etc. [:ll 54 Step (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multifunction lock (p.56).
Basic Operations ◄-~~!--:~~:• i, (1) After pressing a button, turn the <~ > dial. Press a button such as or , then turn the< ~ > dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shootingready state. 7 ~~=-',::=::~i (2) Turn only the< ~ > dial. While looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel, turn the< ~ > dial. Use this dial to set the exposure compensation amount, the aperture setting for manual exposures, etc.
Basic Operations Multl...Punetloni Loek au By setting [t6: Multi function lock] and pressing the button, you can prevent settings from being changed by accidentally operating the Main dial, Quick control dial, M-Fn bar, or control ring or tapping the touch-screen panel. Press the button again to unlock the controls. • Each press of the < :f>_: > button changes the information on the LCD panel. • Illuminate the LCD panel by holding down the < =~:- > button ( ~6 ).
Basic Operations <-> M-Fn (Muttt-Fu~)~-lt You can assign commonly used functions to swiping the < bar and tapping each end. By default, no function is assigned. After purchase or when no function is assigned, you can access a shortcut screen for the (.~.4: Customize M-Fn bar] setting menu by tapping the left end on < . Select [Yes] to access the setting screen (p.188). Basic Operations Swipe Slide your finger left or right immediately after touching < .
Basic Operations Each press of the button changes the information shown. The following sample screens are for still photos.
Menu Operations and Settings (1) ---+-l{lollOU))\ (2) --tt-++-----+-+t-lc::BI (3) -........i.+-- ~~~~~~~:§-~~ I (6) (7) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) _ _ _ _ _ ___, .____ (5) -----
Menu Operations and Settings ~} ~) ~} Image quality Dual Pixel RAW ~} I I ~} ~} •L Disable OCropping/aspect ratio Image review 1 2 sec. Release shutter without card ON (10) i 1 (6) CE : Playback (7) t (8) .~. : Custom Functions ~~l t ;MJ Menu (4) Main tabs Secondary tabs Menu items Q: Shooting (5) AF: Autofocus (10) (1) (2) (3) : Set-up Menu settings 1 Display the menu screen. • Press the l 60
Menu Operations and Settings 3 Select an item. Wt1Ite ~ ir, ~ Custom Wt11te Balance WB Shift/Bkt 0.0/tO Color ~µace sRGB Picture Style Auto • Turn the < ~ > dial to select an item, then press . I 4 Select an option. White iJilldllCP Cloudy (Approx 6000Kl • Turn the < g > dial to select an option. • The current setting is indicated in blue. S Confirm the option. White bdldlH ,, .. • Press to set it. Custom White Balance WB Shift!Bkt Color spale Picture Style 0.
Menu Operations and Settings Example: Highlight tone priority Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The menu item is dimmed if another function setting is overriding it. Highlight tone priority Metering timer 8 sec. Expo. simulation Enable Auto Lighting Optimizer Not available because of the associc1ted function's setting · Highlight tone priority 0 [i} 62 D+ You can see the overriding function by selecting the dimmed menu item and pressing .
6 Touch-Screen Operation You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen (touch-screen panel) with your finger. Sample screen (Quick Control) • Use your finger to tap on (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the screen. • For example, when you tap on [m], the Quick Control screen appears. By tapping on(!>], you can return to the preceding screen. ·pt~:; li'-'~;,qro: Sample screen (Menu screen) • Slide your finger while touching the screen.
[!I Quick Control You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen. This is called Quick Control. 'v,::;:2;:;;:::::;, 1 Press the <[!I> button ((!,10 ). l Select a setting item. • Press the < ! > <, > keys to select an item. • When the screen at left is displayed, press the<'>< ◄ >< ► > keys for selection. 3 Select an option. • Turn the or<~> dial, or press the < ◄ > < ► > keys to change the setting.
Shooting This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on the shooting ([OJ) tab. • A* icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [MJ, or [BULB) mode.
-1 Shooting Still Photos [Sboofl119 M~ -•ttings·,Orltlll Photos To prepare for still photo shooting, press the button, then press the button to access the [Shooting mode] screen at left. [m-1 : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.88) [Fv] : Flexible-priority AE (p.97) [P] : Program AE (p.93) [Tv] : Shutter-priority AE (p.94) [Av] : Aperture-priority AE (p.95) [M] : Manual exposure (p.
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting • Shooting 1 Image quality Dual Pixel RAW Qcropping/aspect ratio Image review FULi: 2 sec. Release shutter without card ON --p.70 --IPDFI --p.72 --p.87 '------IPDFI I • Shooting 2 --p.84 --·IPDFI • Shooting 3 3 Expo.comp./AEB -3 .. 2.. 1. .cp..1..2.~3 01S0 speed settings Auto Lighting Optimizer Highlight tone priority Metering timer 8 sec. Expo. simulation Enable ~□ OFF --p.103 --!PDFI --p.80 '------ p.
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting • Shooting 4 4 White balance 9 --p.78 WB Shift/Bkt. 0,0/±0 Color space sRGB --!PDF! --IPDF! --IPDF! Picture Style Standard --p.75 Custom White Balance • Shooting 5 --p.82 --p.81 =---IPDF! Touch Shutter Disable :--p.92 Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HOR --IPDF! !PDFI • Shooting 6 --!PDF! Anti-flicker shoot. Disable c--p.86 Mode 1 --!PDFI '----- IPDF! --IPDFI Silent shutter Silent LV shoot.
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting In [~] mode, the following screen is displayed. • Shooting 1 Image quality Dual Pixel RAW Image review 2 sec. Release shutter without card ON Touch Shutter Disable Movie rec quality =-FHDBOffl --p.70 --IPDFI ,--p.87 I --IPDFI --p.92 ~-p.
Setting Image Quality You can select the pixel count and the image quality. JPEG image quality options include • L, II L, • M, II M, • S1 , II S1 , and S2 . RAW image quality options include fiE!lJ and Clml!n . lllld~ll' qu 1l1ty Dual Pixel RAW .L Disable OCropping/aspect ratio Image review 1 Select [01: Image quality]. FULL 2 sec. Release shutter without card ON l 70 Set the image quality. • To select the RAW quality, turn the dial, and to select the JPEG quality, press the < ◄ > < ► > keys.
Setting Image Quality A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the quality as follows: [!WJ or Cl&'J. Cl&'J produces RAW images with smaller file sizes than [!WJ. RAW images can be processed using [[:El 1: RAW image processing] and saved as JPEG images. (Just as for [!WJ, all JPEG size options are available for Clml2J.
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio* Normally with RF or EF lenses, images are captured at the sensor size of approx. 36.0 x 24.0 mm in full-frame shooting, but in cropped shooting, you can isolate and magnify the center of the image approx. 1.6x (APS-C size) as if using a telephoto lens, or you can set an aspect ratio to suit your shooting application before shooting. For EF-S lenses, a 3:2 aspect ratio in the center is captured, magnified approx. 1.6x (APS-C size).
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio Setting examples FULL set 4 Take the picture. • When [1.6x (crop)] is set or an EF-S lens is used, an image magnified approx. 1.6x is displayed. • When [1 :1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set, the image within the black masked or outlined area is captured.
ISO: Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos* Set the ISO speed (image sensor's sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In [(!!] mode, ISO speed is set automatically. 1 Press the button ( 6 ). • With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. l Select the ISO speed item. • Turn the < ~ > dial to select the ISO speed item. 3 Set the ISO speed. • Turn the < S > dial to set it. • ISO speed can be set within ISO 100-40000 in 1/3-stop increments.
Selecting a Picture Style* Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject. In [@] mode, [ ~ ] (Auto) is set automatically. -------- 1 Select [04: Picture Style]. I l 4 0 0 0 4
Selecting a Picture Style • [ 1.;:~AI] Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes. • [1.;:~s1] Standard The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose Picture Style suitable for most scenes. • [1.;:~el] Portrait For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up portraits. • [l.;::.
Selecting a Picture Style • (l.:;~I] Faithful Suited for prdcessing the image with a computer. The color of a subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the subject's colorimetrical' color. For subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation. • (l,.;;#vJJ Monochrome Creates black-and-white images. .I • (I.:;. 11) User Defined 1-3 You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [LandscapeJa Picture Style file, etc.
WB: Setting the White Balance* White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the Auto [B] (Ambience priority) or [Bw] (White priority) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object. In [a!] mode, [B] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. 1 Press the button (~6}.
Setting the White Balance c•1 Auto Wtpft-, ~~~AA~,~ With (91 (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity of the image's warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select [9w1 (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image's warm color cast. If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS DIGITAL camera models, select (91 (Ambience priority). I 1 Select [04: White-------balance]. l Select [m¥n]]. • With (91 selected, press the button.
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast* • If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. In[@] mode, [Standard] is set automatically. 1 Select [03: Auto Lighting ExpocompJ,EB Q1s0 L/ .. 1 _er:., 1.·, Optimizer]. speecJ ,ett1nc10 t,,, ~] H1ghl1ght torn, priur,tv OFF Metering uvi..r 8 sec Expo wrn1lat1t'11 Enable 2 Set a correction option.
Setting Noise Reduction* High ISO ,SpeedNolse Red~. This function reduces the noise generated in the image. It is especially effective at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced . 1 Select [05: High ISO speed NR]. I 2 Set the level. • Select the desired noise reduction level, then press < SET>. • [~] Multi Shot Noise Reduction Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
Setting Noise Reduction Long.Expo,ure .Noise .it For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced. 1 Select [Q S: Long exp. noise reduction]. Long exp no1,P reciuct1on High ISO ,peed NR Dust Delete Data Touch Shutter Disable Multiple exposure HDR Mode Disable 01\able HOR l Set a reduction option. • Select an option, then press . • [AUTO] Auto For exposures of 1 sec.
Highlight Tone Priority* You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights. 1 Select [03: Highlight tone priority]. Expo.cornp _IAEB ·1. 1 0150 speed setting~ Auto Lighting Optimizer Highlight to:1c priority Metering timer 1 2.+J ~: OFF Expo. simulation Highlight tone pnority Enable Enhanced llm!JHelp l I Set an option. • [Enable]: Improves gradation in highlights. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights.
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics* Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the optical characteristics of the lens. Image distortion due to optical characteristics of the lens is called distortion. Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. And decreased image sharpness due to the aperture is called diffraction phenomenon. These lens aberrations can be corrected.
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics 3 Select [Enable]. • Confirm that the name of the attached lens and (except for diffraction correction) (Correction data available] are displayed. • Select [Enable], then press . 4 Take the picture. I • The image captured will have lens aberration corrected. The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered (stored) in the camera.
Reducing Flicker* If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result. This feature enables the camera to detect the flickering frequency and take pictures when exposure and colors are- less affected by flickering. 1 Select [06: Anti-flicker shoot.].
Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the screen immediately after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set [Hold]. To not have the captured image displayed, set [Off]. 1 Select [ 01: Image review]. l Set a time option. • Select an option, then press . 1:1] When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in [ t 2: Power saving].
(At Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) [(A;] is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of the subject (p.91 ). ----------------1 Set the shooting mode to[~]• Press the button. • Turn the<~> dial to select [(E"], then press . l Aim the camera at what you will shoot (the subject).
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ► For moving subjects, the AF point is displayed in blue and tracks subject movement. The camera does not beep. (Servo AF) 4 Take the picture. D 0 • Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. ► The image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the screen. Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving} may not be detected correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) • Focusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point). Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway (p.52). If you are too close to the subject, move away and shoot again. • Multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously. If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these positions are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the subject, you can take the picture.
(At Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)• :Recom: . ~In . . ..P ... Cl •--:~sttet .. ,·,,.... ,·· I Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective. In the [(AJ] mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject.
~ Shooting with the Touch Shutter Just by tapping on the screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically. Enable the Touch Shutter. l • Tap Ca] on the screen's bottom left. Each time you tap on the icon, it will toggle between [a] and [~]. •[~](Touch Shutter: Enable) The camera will focus on the spot you tap on, then the picture will be taken. • Ca] (Touch Shutter: Disable) You can tap on a spot to perform focusing on the spot. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
P: Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject's brightness. This is called Program AE. * [P] stands for Program. * AE stands for Auto Exposure. 1 Set the shooting mode to [P]. I l Focus on the subject. • Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. ► Once the subject is in focus, the AF point turns green (with One-Shot AF). ► The shutter speed and aperture are set automatically. 3 Check the display.
Tv: Shutter-Priority AE In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion. * [Tv] stands for Time value. Blurred motion (Slow speed: 1/30 sec.) Frozen motion (Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.
Av: Aperture-Priority AE In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
M: Manual Exposure In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a commercially available exposure meter. This method is called manual exposure. * [ M] stands for Manual. 1 Set the shooting mode to [M]. 2 Set the ISO speed (p.74). • With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation. 3 Set the shutter speed and aperture. • To set the shutter speed, turn the < a > dial. To set the aperture, turn the< ~ > dial.
Fv: Flexible-Priority AE In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed manually or automatically and combine these settings with your choice of exposure compensation. Shooting in [fv] mode, with control over each of these parameters, is equivalent to shooting in [P] , [Tv], [Av] , or [M] mode. * [FV] stands for Flexible value. 1 Set the shooting mode to [Fv). I l Set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed. • Turn the < ~ > dial to select an item to set.
Flexible-Priority AE Combinations of Functions in [Fv] Mode Shutter , SJ)98(1 .. ... ~ "·~ ,· ISOSpeed . . . Exposure Compensation Shooting Mode Available Similar to [P] Available Similar to [Tv] Available Similar to [Av] [AUTO] [AUTO] [AUTO] Manual selection [AUTO] Manual selection ,..........
~ Selecting the Drive Mode Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject. ------------1 Press the button (~6). • With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. l I Select the drive mode item. • Turn the< ~ mode item. > dial to select the drive 3 Select the drive mode. • Tum the < ~ > dial to make a selection. • [□] Single shooting When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.
Selecting the Drive Mode • [~] Low-speed continuous shooting When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. while you keep holding it down. • [~lo] Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control • [ ~ 2 ] Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control For self-timer shooting, see page 101.
(S) Using the Self-Timer Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph. 1 Press the button l (~6). • With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. Select the drive mode item. • Turn the < ~ > dial to select the drive mode item. 3 Select the self-timer. • Turn the < ~ > dial to select the selftimer. ~,o: Shoot in 1Osec. ~2: Shoot in 2 sec.
~ Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation* Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera. Exposure compensation can be set in the [Fv], [P] , [Tv] , [Av] , and [ M] shooting modes. You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments. 1 Check the exposure. ln?reas~d exposure for a brighter image 1 '320 F2.8 -• 3 2 8'#1 l • Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator.
~ Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) * ..... By changing the shutter speed, aperture, or ISO speed automatically, you can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three consecutive shots. This is called AEB. * AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing. 1 Select [03: Expo.comp./AEB]. Expo rnmp /AEB r,1 1.: ·, l .! OISO speed settings; Auto Lighting Optimizer ~-= H19hl19ht tone pr1011ty OFF Metering timer i3 sec Expo s,1111uiation Enable I l Darker 6. 5 4 .3 Li.
* Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)* - You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the<*> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc. ,, 1 Focus on the subject. • Press the shutter button halfway. ► The exposure setting will be displayed. 2 Press the < * > button (~8 ).
~ Flash Photography Using an EUEX series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography easy. For operation procedures, refer to the EUEX series Speedlite's Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features of EUEX series Speedlites. • Flash exposure compensation You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation).
-2 Shooting Movies To prepare for movie shooting, press the button, then press the button to access the [Shooting mode] screen at left. [•~•1 : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.114) P9'] : Program AE (p.114) [•;.rv] : Shutter-priority AE (p.115) [•~] : Aperture-priority AE (p.116) [•"M] : Manual exposure (p.117) [•"''/•ft'/•,.']: Custom shooting mode (IPDFI) []] You can also shoot movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo shooting.
Tab Menus: Movie Shooting • Shooting 1 Movie rec quality ~FHD B Movie cropping Disable Sound recording Auto - - p . 1 09 .lf'._B. --!PDF! --!PDF! --!PDF! ;--!PDFl Time code Movie digital IS Disable • Shooting 2 --IPDFl ,--IPDFl :--!PDF! Lens aberration correction Time-lapse movie Disable Remote control Disable • Shooting 3 Exposure comp. 3.. 2.. 1. .r£.. 1 .2.:3 '"ISO speed settings Auto Lighting Optimizer ~ Highlight tone priority OFF '"" Auto slow shutter Metering timer 8 sec.
Tab Menus: Movie Shooting r I • Shooting 4 4 r:.wliJ Custom White Balance WB correction 0,0 Picture Style Standard White balance High ISO speed NR HDMI display O+Cl --IPDFI --IPDFI =---IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI .10 IPDFI --1PDFI In [ •~+] mode, the following screens are displayed. • Shooting 1 Movie rec quality --p.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality Under the (IOI 1: Movie rec quality] tab, select [Movie rec. size] to set the image size, frame rate, and compression method. The movie will be recorded as an MP4 file. The frame rate displayed on the [Movie rec. size] screen switches automatically depending on the (" 3: Video system] setting. D The card's writing and reading speeds required for recording movies (card performance requirements) vary depending on the movie recording quality. ,JAi....:·dfRicOtdlng·'..
Setting the Movie Recording Quality • Shooting 4K movies requires a high-performance card. • Shooting 4K movies or High Frame Rate movies greatly increases the processing load, which may cause the camera's internal temperature to increase faster or become higher than for regular movies. If a red D icon appears during movie shooting, the card may be hot, so stop shooting the movie and let the camera cool down before removing the card. (Do not remove the card immediately.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality Movle-RftCOrdlng Coverage Image sensor coverage for movies varies depending on movie recording quality and cropped shooting settings and the lens used. With EF-S lenses, movies are cropped around the center of the image. • RF or EF lenses: With [O 1: Movie cropping] set to [Disable] (1) , I (1) ----------.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality • Frame rate (fps: frame per second) • [IBll] 119.9fps/[Dm] 59.94fps/[11Ji] 29.97fps For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). • (KB] 100.0fps/[llll] 50.00fps/[BI] 25.00fps For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.). • [Bi] 23.98fps/[BII] 24.00fps Mainly for motion pictures. Bi (23.98fps) is available when [~ 3: Video system] is set to [For NTSC].
Setting the Movie Recording Quality • Movie recording format • [&]] MP4 All movies you shoot with the camera are recorded as movie files in MP4 format (file extension ".MP4"). This file format provides higher compatibility for playback than with MOV.
•9' Shooting Movies ,t-·1•9' A11toexPQ111re ·ShoOtlng When the shooting mode is set to [•~A•] or ['9'] , autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene's current brightness. 1 Set the shooting mode to [•~A•] or C-9']. Scene Intelligent AL ♦ •• I\ •• I\ •&" ,.: I\ 1, • Press the button. • Turn the<~> dial to select [•~A•] or ['9']. 2 Focus on the subject. • Before shooting a movie, focus with AF or manual focus (p.131-136, 139).
Shooting Movies [•,1'v] mode enables you to set your preferred shutter speed for movies. ISO speed and aperture are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard exposure. 1 Set the shooting mode to [•,1'v]. I l Set the desired shutter speed (1 ). • Turn the <8> dial as you watch the screen. • The settable shutter speeds vary depending on the frame rate. (1) 3 Focus and shoot the movie. • The procedure is the same as steps 2 and 3 for "Autoexposure Shooting" (p.114).
Shooting Movies ',~---,-!: [ •~v] mode enables you to set your preferred aperture for movies. ISO speed and shutter speed are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard exposure. 1 Set the shooting mode to [•~vJ. l Set the desired aperture (1 ). • Turn the< ~ > dial as you watch the screen. (1 ) 3 Focus and shoot the movie. • The procedure is the same as steps 2 and 3 for "Autoexposure Shooting" (p.114).
Shooting Movies You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users. 1 Set the shooting mode to [•"M]. I l Set the ISO speed. • Press the button. • Turn the dial to select the ISO speed item. • Turn the dial to set it. 3 Set the shutter speed (1) and aperture (2). • Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator. • To set the shutter speed, turn the dial.
AF This chapter describes autofocus operation and introduces menu settings on the AF ([AF]) tab. * • A icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M ], or [BULB] mode. D stands for autofocus. stands for manual focus.
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos) • AF1 AF operation ONE SHOT AF AF method AF frame size AF □ --p.126 --p.128 Normal --IPDFI Continuous AF Disable Touch & drag AF settings • AF2 120 --p.137 p.
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos) •AF3 --!PDF! ,---!PDF! --IPDFI •AF4 I --!PDF! --!PDF! --IPDFI • AF5 Lem,·· AF ;mpossible Limit AF methods [j} Orientation linked AF point ~L] Initial Servo AF pt for~~~ AUTO --!PDFI --!PDF! --IPDFI '--IPDFI Features in [AF3], [AF4], and [AF5) menus are described.in the camera's Help system (p.166).
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos) In [a!] mode, the following screen is displayed. •AF1 Continuous AF Disable Touch & drag AF settings CA.r Auto servo Focus guide 122 Enable Off --p.
Tab Menus: AF (Movies) • AF1 AF method AF □ Touch & drag AF settings Enable Movie Servo AF --p.128 :--IPDFI --p.
Tab Menus: AF (Movies) • AF3 --IPDFI - - IPDFI • AF4 • AFS ~ - - IPDFI - - IPDFI [j] Features in [Af 3], [AF4], and [AFS] menus are described in the camera's Help system (p.166).
Tab Menus: AF (Movies) - In [•~A•] mode, the following screen is displayed. • AF1 Touch & drag AF settings Movie Servo AF Enable Focus guide Off --!PDF! =---p.
Selecting the AF Operation* You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. 1 Select [ AF 1: AF operation]. AF SHOT AF l)P(''illlOll AF method AF frame size Continuous AF Disable Toucl1 & drag AF settings 2 Select an item.
Selecting the AF Operation Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. • When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. • The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture. This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.
Selecting the AF Method You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. The camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in an AF point or Zone AF frame. In[~] mode, [~+Tracking] is set automatically. For instructions on selecting an AF method, see page 131 . ~[]: Face+Tracking The camera detects and focuses on human faces. The AF point< : appears over a detected face, which is then tracked . :> If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF.
Selecting the AF Method a a'ala: Expand AF area ( -~·) Focusing uses one AF point < □ > and points above, below, and to the left and right . Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Although Servo AF requires you to focus on a subject initially with an AF point < □ >, focusing is easier with this AF method than with Zone AF. aaa :'al: : Expand AF area: Around Focusing uses one AF point and surrounding points .
Selecting the AF Method :=: Large Zone AF: Vertical Uses auto selection AF in a vertical Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-pointAF/AF point expansion and also effective for moving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame. AF points in focus are displayed with < □ >.
Selecting the AF Method Selecting. the AF Method* You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. If you prefer to focus manually, see page 139. 1 Select [ AF 1: AF method]. l I Select an item.
Selecting the AF Method • ~(face)+Tracking: ~:: The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the AF point < : : > also moves to track the face. 1 Check the AF point. ► l < : : > (an AF point) appears over any face detected. • To choose a different face, first press the < HH > button, after which < ◄: :• > appears when multiple faces are detected. Use the< ◄ >< ► > keys to move < ◄: :• > over the face you want to focus on.
Selecting the AF Method Specifying a Subject for Focus On the screen, tap where you want to focus, whether on a subject or at a certain position. Once the AF point <: :> achieves focus, the AF point will also move to track the subject if you change the composition or if the subject moves.
Selecting the AF Method • 1-point AF / Expand AF area (a~•)/ Expand AF area: Around I Zone AF/ Large Zone AF: Vertical/ Large Zone AF: Horizontal* You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF screens are used as an example. -"' 1 Check the AF point. ► (1) l The AF point ( 1) will appear. • With Expand AF area (a~•) or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF points are also displayed.
Selecting the AF Method 3 Focus on the subject. • Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. ► When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. ► If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange. I 4 Take the picture.
Selecting the AF Method AF Operation • Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again. • Image brightness may change during autofocusing. • Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease. • If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and focusing may be difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume shooting with AF under the light source you will use.
Focusing on People's Eyes* You can shoot with the subject's eyes in focus. --------------1 Select [ AF 1: Eye Detection AF]. 2 Select [Enable]. I 3 Aim the camera at the subject. ► An AF point is displayed around their eye. • You can also touch the screen to select an eye. 4 Take the picture.
Setting Continuous AF This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway. AF operation --- 1 Select [ AF 1: Continuous AF]. 2 Select [Enable]. ONE SHOT AF AF method AFC AF frame size Normal (
MF: Focusing Manually · If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and focus manually. 1 Set the lens's focus mode switch to . • Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly. 2 Magnify the image. • Press the button, then the button. I 3 Move the magnified area. (1) • Move the area horizontally by turning the < ~ > dial or vertically by turning the < ~ > dial. You can also move the area by pressing the < ◄} > cross keys.
MF: Focusing Manually 4 Adjust magnification. • Each press of the button changes the magnification ratio, as follows. ---+• 1X-+ 5X-+ 10X 5 Focus manually. • While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to focus. • After focusing, press to return to the normal view. 6 Take the picture.
Setting Movie Servo AF With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie shooting. 1 Select [AF1: Movie Servo AF]. AF method AF n Touch & drag AF ,E'ttin'.J, Movie AF E11 ,r :, 2 Select [Enable]. I • When [Enable] is set: • The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
Playback This chapter covers topics related to playback-playing back captured still photos and movies-and introduces menu settings on the Playback ([[E]) tab. Images shot and saved with another device Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that have been edited or renamed on a computer.
Tab Menus: Playback • Playback 1 Protect images Rotate image Erase images Print order Photobook Set-up Image transfer RAW image processing - - IPDFl =-- ·!PDF! :- -p.151 ' -!PDFI - - !PDFI - -!PDFI = --!PDFI • Playback 2 Resize Rating Slide show Set image search conditions Image jump w/,,...
Play back the image. • Press the <[El> button. l Select an image. • To play back newer images, press the < ► > button, and to play back older images, press the < ◄ > button. • Each time you press the button, the display will change. I Shooting information display 3 Exit the image playback. • Press the < [E > button to exit the image playback.
Image Playback <, With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press the < ! > > keys to change the information displayed. You can also customize the information displayed, in [[E3: Playback information display].
Image Playback Touch PlaylMld{ The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones and similar devices. First, press the < [E > button to prepare for touch playback. Browsing images I Index display Jump display Magnified view [ll You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
~ Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) • Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or 100 images on one screen. 1 Press the<~> button. °' • During image playback, press the < > button. ► [io3 ~] will be displayed on the lower right of the screen. l t: . . :..t - .._ ' , .. .. Switch to the index display. • Turn the < i& > dial counterclockwise. ► The 4-image index display will appear. The selected image is highlighted with an orange frame.
•" Playing Back Movies rfrrr@~~~~C-7 1 Play back the image. • Press the <[E> button. 2 Select a movie. • Press the < ◄ > < ► > keys to select the movie to be played back. • In the single-image display, the < mil ~ > icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie. • In the index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie. As movies cannot be played back from the index display, press to switch to the singleimage display.
Playing Back Movies Movie Playback Panel ' ' Item ► Play I► Slow motion ~ First frame ◄ II Previous frame 11 ► Next frame ►►I Last frame ~ Edit ~ Frame Grab •. mm' ss" '4~Volume 150 . Playback Operations Pressing toggles between playback and stop. Adjusts the slow motion speed by turning the < O > dial. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the screen. Displays the movie's first frame. Displays the previous frame each time you press .
mi Erasing Images You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase them in one batch. Protected images will not be erased. 0 Once an Image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being erased accidentally, protect them. ,Erasing a Single Image 1 Select the image to be erased. l • Press the <[El> button. • Press the < ◄ > < ► > keys to select the image to be erased. Press the < 1ifJ > button.
Set-up . This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up-([t])-tab. . . 9 * • i • A icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in [Fv], [Pl, [TvJ, [Av], [M), or (BULB] mode.
Tab Menus: Set-up • Set-up 1 Select folder File numbering Continuous File name Auto rotate OnQQ !PDF! !PDF! - - !PDF! - - IPDFI - - p.157 Format card • Set-up 2 Power saving Disp. brightness -•·· :-+-+--~--+-+ • I _.'1"' ••,_ '•' Disp. color tone Standard Date/rime/Zone Languagew 08/08/'18 04:30 English - - p.158 - - p.159 '---- p.160 !PDFI p.161 ' - - p .163 • Set-up 3 3 Video system For NTSC Touch control Beep Standard - - !PDF! '--- !PDF! Enable '---- p.164 -·-~•.-- Battery info.
Tab Menus: Set-up • Set-up 4 --!PDF! --!PDF! --!PDF! --!PDF! --!PDF! • Set-up 5 --p.167 --!PDF! I • Set-up 6 --!PDFI --!PDFI --p.
Tab Menus: Set-up When you are shooting movies, the following screen is displayed for [t4]. 4 Shooting info. disp. VF display format Display settings ~ btn function Help text size Small --!PDFI --!PDFI --!PDFI :::::::---- !PDF I --!PDFI In [ (!1] and [ .,,,._♦] modes, the following screen is displayed for [t6].
Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera. 0 When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a computer, etc. before formatting the card. 1 Select [ ~ 1: Format card]. Select tolder File nurntwrir,q File name Auto rotate l Format the card.
Setting Eco Mode Enables you to conserve battery power in shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery consumption. 1 Select [~2: Eco mode). t 1 . Eco i lll(a1•· (if I Power ,av1n9 • Disp brightness ·•· Disp color tone Standard DatelT1me/Zone Languageep •· 08/08f18 04:30 English 2 Select [On]. • The screen darkens when the camera is not used for approximately two seconds. Approx. ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off.
Setting Power-Saving Features You can adjust the timing of when the screen, camera, and viewfinder turn off automatically (Display off, Auto power off, and Viewfinder off). 1 Select [~2: Power saving]. 2 Select an item. • Even when [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn off after the time set in [Display off].
Adjusting the Screen Brightness Screen and viewfinder brightness can be adjusted separately. 1 Select ["2: Disp. brightness]. Eco mode Power ,av1w1 ll:, D1•.1· t,r1yt1t11h\ Disp. color tone DateiT1rneiZone LanguagejJ Standard 08/08118 04:30 English 2 Make the adjustment. • Referring to the gray chart, press the < ◄ > < ► > keys to adjust the brightness, then press . • When adjusting viewfinder brightness, look through the viewfinder as you set it.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone When you tum on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone first. By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it. Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and time information, be sure to set your date/time. ----- 1 Select [t2: Date/Time/Zone]. 2 Set the time zone.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone • Press the < ◄ > < ► > keys to select a [Time difference] item (+/-/hour/ mlnute), then press . • Press the < ! > <, > keys to set it, then press . • After entering the time zone or time difference, press the < ◄ > < ► > keys to select [OK], then press . 3 Set the date and time. • Press the < ◄ > < ► > keys to select an item, then press . • Press the <.A> > keys to set it, then press . <, 4 Set the daylight saving time.
Setting the Interface Language 1 Select [~2: Languagew]. l Set the desired language.
Disabling Beeps for Camera Operations You can disable beeping when subjects are in focus or for other operations. 1 Select[~ 3: Beep]. ~ 3 Video system For NTSC Touch control Standard i; !k•·p t•Mhlf' ::r;l Battery info. Sensor cleaning HDMI resolution Auto HDMI HOR output Off 2 Select an item. • Touch ;tl' The beeper will be silent only for touch operations. • Disable Disables beeping when subjects are in focus, when you shoot with the self-timer, and when you use touch operations.
:-~ Sensor Cleaning Self-cleaning of the front of the sensor is performed whenever you set the power switch to . You can also activate sensor cleaning manually. 1 Select [~3: Sensor cleaning]. l Select [Clean now to-]. • Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
@ Help When [llli]Help] is displayed below a menu, you can display a description about the feature by pressing the button. Press it again to exit Help display. To scroll the screen when a scrollbar (1) appears on the right, press the < ! > < T > keys or turn the < O > dial. • Example: (05: High ISO speed NR] . INFO (1) • Example: [~6: Multi function lock] Multi function luck Main Dial . INFO OK ClrH Pl Ima Help • Example: [Af 3: Tracking sensitivity] Tracking sens1t1v1ty .
Setting Wireless Features You can connect the camera to a smartphone or computer wirelessly and send your shots or control the camera remotely. 1 Select [~5: Wireless communication settings]. l Set the item. • For details, see Chapter 6, 'Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions".
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings* • The camera's settings for shooting functions and menu functions can be reverted to their defaults. 1 Select [~6: Clear all camera settings]. Multi funct,on lock Cu,torn ,h 1 Y•till'l morle i:c 1-( 3J (,,, :r di [ irn,'r: ·.,,rt1nq'> Copyright information Manuc1! ,oftware URL Cert,! ,c at,on Logo Display Firmware Over 1 oO l 168 Select [OK].
Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions This chapter describes how to send images wirelessly from the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi®.
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions CANON iMA@E GATEWAY (CANON iMAGE GATEWAY) (4) Send images to a Web service (3) Print images using a Wi-Fi printer (2) Use with EOS software or other dedicated software Important Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage from erroneous wireless communication settings when using the camera . In addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions (1) □ Communicate with a smartphone Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over a Wi-Fi connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones or tablets (collectively referred to as "smartphones" in this manual). (2) Q Use with EOS software or other dedicated software Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the camera remotely using EOS Utility (EOS software).
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi • Connecting to a smartphone via Wi-Fi enables you to perform the following: • View images stored in the camera on a smartphone or save viewed images to a smartphone. • Operate the camera to take a picture or change camera settings using a smartphone. • Send images to a smartphone from the camera. To connect the camera to a smartphone, a smartphone on which Android or iOS is installed is necessary.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi • Use the latest version of the smartphone OS. • Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone. Android iOS [jJ • For the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the download site of Camera Connect.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi a.tiblishing a·. Steps on the Camera (1) 1 Select[" 5: Wireless communication settings]. l Select [Wi-Fi settings]. 3 Select [Wi-Fi]. 4 Select [Enable]. • After the [Wi-Fi settings] screen appears, press the
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi 5 Select [Bluetooth function]. 6 Select [Bluetooth function]. 7 Select [Smartphone]. 8 Register [Nickname]. Nickname Register a nickname to, the camera This nickname be used W e ; l x :111 1 ancl Bluetooth I t a s d f z I i>•1111h c Y h g v U b Cl k • When using the displayed nickname, press the
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi 9 Select [OK]. 10 Select [Pairing]. flluetooth L111, t1ur, Blut.'ltJutt, function )llldilpliurn· ~\ F"..11r1nq Bluetooth address Stay corm 1f off D,,able 11 Select an item. • If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. • If Camera Connect is not installed, select [Android] or [iOS], scan the displayed QR code with the smartphone to access Google Play or App Store and install Camera Connect. ► Pairing now begins.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the Smartphone (1) 12 Enable the Bluetooth function. 13 Start Camera Connect. New Bluetooth enabled camera found. Choose a camera fOf pairing. 14 Select the camera to pair with. ► If you are using an Android smartphone, go to step 16. 81uetooth ernibllld cameot& EOS Bluetooth Pairing Request 15 Tap on [Pair] (iOS only). I "EOS__., would like to pair with your. . ._ .
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the Camera (2) 16 Select [OK]. 17 Press . • Pairing is now complete, and the camera is connected to the smartphone via Bl uetooth. ► A Bluetooth icon appears on the main Camera Connect screen. C' ,-1rr1t•ra C:onnt-•c:t -- * : dl 0 • Pairing or Bluetooth connection is not possible if the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an interface cable. The camera cannot be connected to two or more devices at the same time via Bluetooth.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the Smartphone (2) 18 Select a Camera Connect function. • In iOS, select [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera connection. ► When a Wi-Fi connection is established, the screen for the selected function will appear. ► [□ Wi-Fi on] is displayed on the camera. ► The Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on the main Camera Connect screen. I The devices are now connected via Wi-Fi.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi [ □ Wi-Fi on] Screen Disconnect,exit • Terminates the Wi-Fi connection. Confirm set. • You can check the settings. Error details • When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the error.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi The main functions of Camera Connect are described below. Images on camera • Images stored in the camera can be viewed. • Images stored in the camera can be saved on a smartphone. • Operations such as deletion can be performed on images stored in the camera. Remote live view shooting • The camera's Live View image can be viewed on a smartphone. • You can shoot with remote operation.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Teffl';llnatlng t To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, perform either of the following operations. On the Camera Connect screen, tap on~. On the [ □ Wi-Fi on] screen, select [Discon nect,exit]. • If the [DWi-Fi on] screen is not displayed, select [Wi-Fi function] on the [~ 5: Wireless communication settings] screen. • Select [Disconnect,exit], then select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi .. ," •c, ;,1:, .. . - ......... Wl..fl'. . .,. - - - .- ;_.. • . ' . ·•& .• · • .. '.·•· .: . ,· .. , 1 Start Camera Connect. • Tap on the Camera Connect icon on the smartphone to start the application. l Select a Camera Connect function. • Select the Camera Connect function you want to use. • A Wi-Fi connection will be automatically established. • In iOS, select [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera connection.
Custom FunctiOns / Myc:» .Jlu i ··.~-- . --~~-~~~; .. ..:_-·"j\ 0 • ?'. • •• . You can fine-tune camera functions and chQnge'. t be .~: functionality of buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences. ,_ . . .· . . You can also add menu items and Custom Functions you adjust frequently to My Menu tabs. that .
Tab Menus: Customization • C.Fn1 Exposure level increments 1/3 ISO speed setting increments 1/3 Bracketing auto cancel ON Bracketing sequence 0-+ Number of bracketed shots 3 Safety shift OFF Same expo. for new aperture OFF --IPDFI --IPDFI '-----IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI --IPDFI • C.Fn2 --IPDFI --IPDFI :---!PDFI • C.Fn3 3 Focus ring rotation -r-.+ -r-.+ -r-.
Tab Menus: Customization • C.Fn4 4 --IPDF! :----- IPDFI ;.-..-p.188 = - - - IPDFI Customize buttons Customize dials Customize M-Fn bar Clear customized settings • C.Fn5 5 Add cropping information OFF Default Erase option ["(9 Release shutter w/o lens OFF Retract lens on power off ON Add IPTC information OFF :----- !PDF! :----- IPDFI --IPDFI :-----IPDFI :----- jPDFI • C.
Customizing the M-Fn (Multi-Function) Bar* • 1 Select [.~.4: Customize M-Fn bar]. Custo:11 1!0 buttons Custom11P dials Clear ,:ustom1zed ~ett1ngs I ,~t,\iqf'PCi r,Jot ,,-, YJriPc: o r: 0 O ''1 1 t1.··rr11-Hir·,i::l·r' (h·ail) L>,.i: :r, iilk,ays available) l Select [O] (for use when shooting) or [[E] (for use during playback). • You can assign different functions to each. @ cdinut ,,if»ly Em)Full cover setting 3 Select a function to assign.
Customizing the M-Fn (Multi-Function) Bar 4 Assign functions to swiping < > or tapping each end. • Selecting [<=>] (swipe), [ ~ ] (tap left end), or (c»] (tap right end) displays a screen to assign functions. • Select options to assign to each operation. • 0 M-Fn bar safety lock To prevent unintended < > operations during shooting, safety lock is set by default. Note that operations are always possible during playback.
Customizing the M-Fn (Multi-Function) Bar • Full Cover Setting When [Full cover setting] is enabled, you can access the M-Fn bar customization screen by fully covering < ~ >. • To configure this setting, press the button on the screen in step 2. ->. [ll • If you prefer not to use < at all, select [Not assigned] in step 3. • Your current action is indicated on the screen.when you use < • To assign your preferred function to bar operations, select [User customization] when assigning functions.
Tab Menus: My Menu --!PDFI --!PDFI --!PDFI --!PDFI I 191
Reference This chapter describes how to download and install the software on a computer, as well as how to download software instruction manuals.
Software Overview You can download the latest version of EOS software or other dedicated software from the Canon website. When using EOS software or other dedicated software, use the latest version available. To download it, you will need to enter the serial number on the bottom of the camera. D • Do not connect the camera to a computer before you Install the software. The software will not be installed correctly. • You cannot install the EOS software to a computer without an Internet connection.
Software Overview l (1) Double-click the dmg file. ► A drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop. If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive icon to display it. (2) Double-click the installer file. ► The installer starts. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon Web site to your computer. • Software Instruction Manual Download Site ► www.canon.
Trademarks • Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. • Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. • Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. e SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. • HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
About MPEG-4 Licensing "This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only ( 1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard." * Notice displayed in English as required.
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended This product is designed !e:achieve optimum perf9.rma~ce when us,<;1 w~(!1 genuine Canon ac;cessories. Tl:lere(o~, using ttiis product with gen_µi~er . accessories is highly recommend~d: '· ' · · · , ·· Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or a~ider\ts such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the' failure of non-gen'uine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery) ..
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others) • The model number is DS126721 (including wireless m·odule·mod~I WM600). • Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use - Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon website to check where use is allowed.
USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. FCC/IC Notice Model: DS126721 (including wireless module model WM600) This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and ISED's applicable licence-exempt RSSs.
FCC Notice (This Product, Model DS126721 systems) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Complies with IMDA Standards D800671 Some logos for technical standards the camera has met can be viewed on the ·screen by choosing MENU ► [t6] tab ► [Certification Logo Display].
I 203
Index Numeric [4K] 3840x2160 (Movie) .................... 109 [A+] (Scene Intelligent Auto) ............... 88 [FHD] 1920x1080 (Movie) ................. 109 [HD] 1280x720 (Movie) ..................... 109 [Q] (Quick Control) .............................. 64 4, 9, 36, or 100 images ...................... 148 Area AF frame ................................... 128 Auto ..................................................... 76 Autofocus - AF Auto Lighting Optimizer ....................... 80 Auto power off .
Index Contrast ............................................... 80 Faithful ................................................. 77 Control ring .......................................... 56 FE lock.... ........................................... 105 Custom Functions.............................. 185 Fine Detail ........................................... 76 Customizing the Multi-function bar .... 188 Flash exposure compensation ........... 105 Flash (Speed lite) ...............................
Index Image-recording quality ....................... 70 Image review time ............................... 87 Images Erasing ........................................... 151 Image quality .................................... 70 Index display .................................. 148 Playback ......................................... 143 Shooting information ...................... 146 Index display...................................... 148 INFO button ......................................... 58 IPB ...........
Index Multi-function bar ................................. 57 Program AE ......................................... 93 Multi function lock ................................ 56 Multi Shot Noise Reduction ................. 81 Q Quick Control. ...................................... 64 Quick control dial ................................. 55 Neutral ................................................. 76 Noise reduction High ISO speed ................................ 81 RAW .....................................
Index Av (Aperture-priority AE) .................. 95 User Def. ............................................. 77 Fv (Flexible-priority AE) .................... 97 M (Manual exposure) ....................... 96 P (Program AE) ................................ 93 Vari-angle screen ........................... 43, 51 Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ..................... 94 Viewfinder Shutter button ...................................... 52 Dioptric adjustment.. .........................
canon The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of May 2018. For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual, refer to the Canon Web site.
Adaptateur de Monture ENG Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Instructions FRN EF-EOS R Mode d'emploi ~ -- -- - - - - - - - \}) Nomenclature Nomenclature CD Lens release lever ® Mount index (EF Lens) CD Levier de deverrouillage de l'objectif ® Repere de montage (objectif EF) ® Repere de montage (objectif EF-S) ® Mount index (E.F-S Lens) © Front mount ® Front contacts © Mount index (camera side) (l) Rear mount ® Rear contacts ® Rubber ring Thank you for purchasing a Canon product.
canon EOSR E ■ Advanced User Guide
Introduction Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the “Safety Instructions” (p.25–27) and “Handling Precautions” (p.28–30). Also, read this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly. Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the Camera While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come out. You can then better understand the camera.
Item Check List Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer. Camera (with eyecup and body cap) Strap Battery Pack LP-E6N (with protective cover) Battery Charger LC-E6/LC-E6E* Interface Cable Cable Protector * Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a power cord.) ooThe camera does not come with a memory card (p.10) or HDMI cable.
Instruction Manuals The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions. The Advanced User Guide (this PDF file), which provides complete instructions, can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or other device. Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals The Advanced User Guide and instruction manuals for lenses and software (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or other device.
Instruction Manuals Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals Using QR Code The Advanced User Guide and instruction manuals for lenses and software (PDF files) can be downloaded to a smartphone or tablet using the QR code. ggwww.canon.com/icpd ooA software application is required to read the QR code. ooSelect your country or region of residence, then download the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals.
Quick Start Guide 1 2 3 4 5 6 Insert the battery (p.43). zz Upon purchase, charge the battery to start using (p.40). Insert the card (p.44). zz With the card’s label facing toward the back of the camera, insert it into the card slot. Attach the lens (p.50). zz Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the camera to attach the lens. zz Make sure the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <2> (p.50). Set the power switch to <1> (p.48). Flip out the screen (p.47).
Quick Start Guide 6 7 8 9 Set the shooting mode to [A] (p.123). zz Press the button and turn the <6> dial to select [A], then press <0>. zz All the necessary camera settings will be set automatically. Focus on the subject (p.56). zz (an AF point) appears over any face detected. zz Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the subject. Take the picture (p.56). zz Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. Review the picture.
About This Manual Chapter Organization Chapters 2–7 correspond to the functions in camera menus. Icons in this Manual : Indicates the Mode button. : Indicates the Main dial. <6> : Indicates the Quick control dial. <5> : Indicates the corresponding direction on the <0> * cross keys. : Indicates the Multi-function bar. : Indicates the lens control ring. : Indicates the Setting button.
About This Manual Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions, Sample Photos zz Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to <1> and no controls are locked with the Multi-function lock (p.48, 60). zz It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults. zz The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM lens as an example. zz The sample photos used in this manual are for instructional purposes only.
Compatible Cards The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera (p.373). zzSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards * UHS-II and UHS-I cards supported. Cards that Can Record Movies When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with good enough performances (fast enough writing and reading speeds) to handle the movie recording quality. For details, see page 611.
Chapters Introduction 2 1 Preparation and Basic Operations 39 2 Shooting 69 3 AF 255 4 Playback 301 5 Set-up 361 6 Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions 423 7 Custom Functions / My Menu 539 8 Reference 571 11
Contents Introduction 2 Item Check List.......................................................................... 3 Instruction Manuals.................................................................... 4 Quick Start Guide....................................................................... 6 About This Manual..................................................................... 8 Compatible Cards.................................................................... 10 Chapters............................
Contents d Touch-Screen Operation...................................................... 67 Q Quick Control...................................................................... 68 2 Shooting 2-1 Shooting Still Photos 69 70 Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting.............................................. 71 Index to Features: Still Photo Shooting.................................... 74 Setting Image Quality............................................................... 75 Setting Up Dual Pixel RAW Shooting.
Contents Card Reminder....................................................................... 118 Setting the Image Review Time............................................. 118 Setting the Metering Timer..................................................... 119 Exposure Simulation.............................................................. 120 Appending Dust Delete Data.................................................. 121 AFully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)............
Contents BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures............................................... 158 w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting........................ 161 P Multiple Exposures........................................................... 166 Remote Control Shooting....................................................... 174 Using a Remote Switch.......................................................... 176 D Flash Photography.............................................................
Contents Tab Menus: AF (Movies)........................................................ 259 Selecting the AF Operation.................................................... 262 Selecting the AF Method........................................................ 265 Setting the AF Point Size....................................................... 276 Focusing on People’s Eyes.................................................... 277 Setting Continuous AF...........................................................
Contents k Enjoying Movies............................................................... 324 k Playing Back Movies........................................................ 325 XEditing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes........................... 327 I Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies........................................................... 329 Slide Show (Auto Playback)................................................... 331 Viewing Images on a Television..............................
Contents Setting Power-Saving Features............................................. 377 Adjusting the Screen Brightness............................................ 378 Adjusting the Screen Color Tone............................................ 379 Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone.................................. 380 Setting the Interface Language.............................................. 383 Setting the Video System.......................................................
Contents Setting Copyright Information ............................................... 420 Checking Other Information................................................... 422 6 Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions 423 What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions.................................... 424 Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi.................................. 427 Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi...................................... 461 Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi.
Contents Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display............................................... 537 7 Custom Functions / My Menu 539 Tab Menus: Customization..................................................... 540 Custom Function Settings...................................................... 542 Customizing Operations......................................................... 555 Tab Menus: My Menu............................................................. 565 Registering My Menu...............................
Index to Features Power Viewfinder zz Charging the battery B p.40 zz Dioptric adjustment B p.54 zz Battery level B p.49 zz Checking battery information zz Information display in viewfinder B p.397 B p.387 zz Household power outlet zz Viewfinder vertical display B p.399 B p.582 zz Eco mode B p.376 zz Viewfinder display format B p.402 zz Power saving B p.377 Cards Screen zz Vari-angle B p.47 B p.67 zz Formatting B p.
Index to Features Metering zz Metering mode Shooting B p.152 Drive zz Drive mode B p.144 zz Self-timer B p.147 zz Silent LV shooting B p.150 zz Silent shooting B p.151 zz Maximum burst B p.77 Image Recording Settings zz Shooting mode B p.70 zz HDR mode B p.161 zz Multiple exposures B p.166 zz Bulb timer B p.159 zz Depth-of-field preview B p.137 zz Remote switch B p.176 zz Remote control B p.174 • Pairing B p.408 zz Quick Control B p.68 zz Touch Shutter B p.
Index to Features zz Attenuator B p.203 zz External flash B p.177 zz Time code B p.205 zz Flash exposure compensation zz Auto slow shutter B p.248 B p.177 zz Av 1/8-stop increments B p.249 zz FE lock B p.177 Flash zz Flash function settings B p.182 zz Flash Custom Function settings B p.187 Movie Shooting zz Autoexposure shooting B p.209 zz HDMI output B p.251 zz Remote control shooting B p.245 Playback zz Image review time B p.118 zz Single-image display B p.304 B p.
Index to Features Image Editing Wireless Features zz RAW image processing B p.339 zz Resizing JPEGs B p.345 zz Cropping JPEGs B p.346 Image Transfer/Print Order zz Image transfer to a computer/FTP server B p.348 zz Print order (DPOF) B p.353 zz Photobook Set-up B p.357 Customization zz Custom Functions (C.Fn) B p.542 B p.566 zz Custom shooting mode B p.417 Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction zz Sensor cleaning B p.391 zz Appending Dust Delete Data B p.121 zz Manual sensor cleaning B p.
Safety Instructions Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely. Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the product or others. WARNING: Denotes the risk of serious injury or death. oo Keep the product out of the reach of young children. A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation. The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.
Safety Instructions oo Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter. • Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a dry cloth. • Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands. • Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet. • Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
Safety Instructions CAUTION: Denotes the risk of injury. oo Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes. oo Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong impacts. oo Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it. This may cause injury or damage to the product. oo Flash emits high temperatures when fired.
Handling Precautions Camera Care zz This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock. zz The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. zz To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly closed.
Handling Precautions zz Do not block shutter curtain operation with your finger or other objects. Doing so may cause a malfunction. zz Use only a commercially available blower to blow away dust when it adheres to the lens, viewfinder, etc. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center. zz Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding.
Handling Precautions Screen, Viewfinder, and LCD Panel zz Although the screen and viewfinder are manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded. zz If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed.
Part Names (1) (12) (13) (14) (2) (15) (3) (4) (5) (16) (17) (6) (7) (18) (19) (8) (20) (21) (9) (22) (10) (11) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) button Movie shooting button <6> Main dial Multi-function button Shutter button LCD panel info switching/ Illumination button (7) AF-assist beam/Self-timer/ Remote control lamp (8) Grip (Battery compartment) (9) DC coupler cord hole (10) Contacts (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) Lens mount Flash sync contacts Hot shoe RF
Part Names (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (7) (8) (9) (5) (10) (15) (11) (16) (17) (12) (18) (19) (13) (14) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) 32 Eyecup Viewfinder eyepiece Dioptric adjustment knob Power switch Terminal cover LCD panel Multi-function lock button <5> Quick control dial AF start button Viewfinder sensor (11) Info button (12) Access lamp (13) Quick Control/Setting button (14) Menu button (15) Remote control terminal (16) Digital terminal (17) External m
Part Names (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (14) (15) (16) (17) Contact cover Accessory positioning hole Screen Tripod socket : cross keys Serial number Playback button Multi-function bar AE lock/FE lock button (13) (10) AF point/Index/Magnify/ Reduce button (11) Strap mount (12) Card slot cover (13) Card slot (14) Battery compartment cover lock (15) Battery compartment cover (16) Erase button (17) Accessory
Part Names LCD Panel Sample display Information displayed varies depending on camera status. For icon details, see page 617. Viewfinder Information Display Sample display 34 Information displayed varies depending on camera status.
Part Names Battery Charger LC-E6 Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.40). (1) (2) (3) (3) (1) Battery pack slot Charge lamp Power plug (2) Battery Charger LC-E6E Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.40).
Part Names Attaching the Strap Pass the end of the strap through the camera’s strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.
Part Names Using the Cable Protector When connecting the camera to a computer, use the included interface cable or a genuine Canon cable. When connecting the interface cable, also use the included cable protector. Using the cable protector helps prevent accidental disconnection and terminal damage.
Part Names Using an Optional Canon Interface Cable When using a genuine Canon interface cable (sold separately), run the cable through the clamp (5) as shown before attaching the clamp to the cable protector. (5) ooThe digital terminal may be damaged if the interface cable is connected without the cable protector. ooMake sure the interface cable is securely connected to the digital terminal. HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended when connecting the camera to a television.
1 Preparation and Basic Operations This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera operations.
Charging the Battery the protective cover 1 Detach provided with the battery. insert the battery in the 2 Fully charger. zz Do the opposite to remove the battery. LC-E6 the battery. 3 Recharge For LC-E6 zz As shown by the arrow, flip out the battery charger’s prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet. For LC-E6E LC-E6E 40 zz Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power outlet. ggRecharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Charging the Battery Charge Level 0–49% 50–74% Charge Lamp Color Orange 75% or higher Fully charged Green Display Blinks once per second Blinks twice per second Blinks three times per second Turned on zz It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
Charging the Battery zz Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged. Charge the battery before use. zz Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used. Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity. zz After recharging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet. zz You can attach the protective cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery is recharged or not.
Inserting/Removing the Battery Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera. Insertion the battery compartment 1 Slide cover lock and open the cover. the battery. 2 Insert zz Insert the end with the electrical contacts. zz Insert the battery until it locks in place. the cover. 3 Close zz Press the cover until it snaps shut. You cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E6N or LP-E6. Removal Open the cover and remove the battery.
Inserting and Removing the Card The captured images are recorded onto the card. Make sure the card’s write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable writing and erasing. Insertion 1 Slide the cover to open it. (1) the card. 2 Insert zz As shown by the illustration, face the card’s label side toward you and insert it until it clicks in place. the cover. 3 Close zz Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrow until it snaps shut.
Inserting and Removing the Card Removal the cover. 1 Open zz Set the power switch to <2>. (1) zz Check that the access lamp (1) is off, then open the cover. zz If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen, close the cover. the card. 2 Remove zz Gently push in the card, then let it go to eject. zz Pull the card straight out, then close the cover. Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera (p.373).
Inserting and Removing the Card ooWhen the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera. • Removing the card. • Removing the battery. • Shaking or striking the camera.
Using the Screen You can change the direction and angle of the screen. 1 Flip out the screen. the screen. 2 Rotate zz When the screen is swung out, you 180° 90° 175° can rotate it up, down, or over 180° to face the subject. zz The indicated angle is only approximate. it toward you. 3 Face zz Normally, use the camera with the screen facing you. ooBe careful not to forcefully rotate the screen, putting much power on the rotating axis (hinge).
Turning on the Power zz <1> Turns the camera on, accompanied by the sound of the shutter curtain opening. Also accompanied by the sound of the aperture opening, when an RF lens is attached. zz <2> Stops camera operation, accompanied by the sound of the shutter curtain closing. Set the power switch to this position when not using the camera. Also accompanied by the sound of the aperture closing, when an RF lens is attached.
Turning on the Power z Battery Level Indicator When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon indicates that the battery will soon be exhausted. Display Level (%) 100–70 69–50 49–20 19–10 9–1 0 Display Level (%) ooDoing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster: • Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period. • Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
Attaching and Detaching a Lens Attaching a Lens the caps. 1 Remove zz Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows. the lens. 2 Attach zz Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place. the lens’s focus mode switch to 3 Set . zz stands for autofocus. zz stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate. 4 Remove the front lens cap.
Attaching and Detaching a Lens Detaching the Lens While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow. zz Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. zz Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens. ooDo not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision. ooWhen attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to <2>. ooIf the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount Adapter EF-EOS R. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses. Attaching a Lens the caps. 1 Remove zz Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows. (1) (2) the lens to the adapter. 2 Attach zz Align the red or white mount index on the lens with the corresponding mount index on the adapter and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.
Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses the lens’s focus mode switch to 4 Set . zz stands for autofocus. zz stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate. 5 Remove the front lens cap. Detaching the Lens 1 While pressing the lens release button, turn the adapter as shown by the arrow. zz Turn the adapter until it stops, then detach it. the lens from the adapter. 2 Detach zz Hold down the lens release lever on the adapter and turn the lens counterclockwise.
Using the Viewfinder Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display to either the screen or viewfinder (p.403). Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity Turn the dioptric adjustment knob. zz Turn the knob left or right to make the viewfinder display look sharp. ooThe viewfinder display and camera screen cannot be activated at the same time. ooAt some aspect ratios, black bars are displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the screen. These areas are not recorded.
Basic Operations Holding the Camera zzViewing the Screen as You Shoot As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see page 47. Normal angle Low angle High angle zzShooting Through the Viewfinder To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake. Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting 1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly. 2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand. 3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button. 4.
Basic Operations Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely. Pressing Halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture. The exposure setting (shutter speed and aperture) is displayed on the screen, in the viewfinder, or on the LCD panel for approx. 8 sec. or as set for the metering timer.* * By default, the metering timer is set to 8 sec.
Basic Operations Mode Button You can set the shooting mode. Press the button, turn the <6> dial, then select the shooting mode. To switch between shooting still photos and movies, press the button and then the button. AF Start Button Has the same effect as pressing the shutter button halfway in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], or [BULB] shooting mode.
Basic Operations <6> Main Dial (1) After pressing a button, turn the <6> dial. Press a button such as or , then turn the <6> dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shootingready state. (2) Turn only the <6> dial. While looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel, turn the <6> dial. Use this dial to set the shutter speed, aperture, etc. Step (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multifunction lock (p.60).
Basic Operations <5> Quick Control Dial (1) After pressing a button, turn the <5> dial. Press a button such as or , then turn the <5> dial. If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shootingready state. (2) Turn only the <5> dial. While looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel, turn the <5> dial. Use this dial to set the exposure compensation amount, the aperture setting for manual exposures, etc.
Basic Operations Multi-Function Lock Button By setting [56: Multi function lock] and pressing the button, you can prevent settings from being changed by accidentally operating the Main dial, Quick control dial, M-Fn bar, or control ring or tapping the touch-screen panel. Press the button again to unlock the controls. For [56: Multi function lock] details, see page 416. LCD Panel Info Switching/Illumination Button zz Each press of the button changes the information on the LCD panel.
Basic Operations M-Fn (Multi-Function) BarM You can assign commonly used functions to swiping the bar and tapping each end. By default, no function is assigned. After purchase or when no function is assigned, you can access a shortcut screen for the [84: Customize M-Fn bar] setting menu by tapping the left end on . Select [Yes] to access the setting screen (p.561). Basic Operations Swipe Slide your finger left or right immediately after touching .
Basic Operations INFO Button Each press of the button changes the information shown. The following sample screens are for still photos.
Menu Operations and Settings (1) (2) (3) (6) (7) (5) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) button button Screen cross keys (5) (6) (7) <0> button Quick control dial Main dial [A] Mode Menu Screen * In [A] mode, some tabs and menu items do not appear.
Menu Operations and Settings Screen in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], and [BULB] Modes (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (1) (2) (10) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Main tabs Secondary tabs Menu items z: Shooting 2: Autofocus (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) 3 : Playback 5 : Set-up 8 : Custom Functions 9 : My Menu Menu settings Menu Setting Procedure the menu screen. 1 Display zz Press the button. a tab. 2 Select zz Press the button to switch between main tabs. zz Turn the <6> dial to select a secondary tab.
Menu Operations and Settings an item. 3 Select zz Turn the <5> dial to select an item, then press <0>. an option. 4 Select zz Turn the <5> dial to select an option. zz The current setting is indicated in blue. the option. 5 Confirm zz Press <0> to set it. the setting. 6 Exit zz Press the button to finish and prepare for shooting. ooThe description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed the button to display the menu screen.
Menu Operations and Settings Dimmed Menu Items Example: Highlight tone priority Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The menu item is dimmed if another function setting is overriding it. You can see the overriding function by selecting the dimmed menu item and pressing <0>. If you cancel the overriding function’s setting, the dimmed menu item will become settable. You may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu items.
d Touch-Screen Operation You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen (touch-screen panel) with your finger. Tap Sample screen (Quick Control) zz Use your finger to tap on (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the screen. zz For example, when you tap on [Q], the Quick Control screen appears. By tapping on [2], you can return to the preceding screen. Drag Sample screen (Menu screen) zz Slide your finger while touching the screen.
Q Quick Control You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen. This is called Quick Control. 1 Press the button (7). a setting item. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select an item. zz When the screen at left is displayed, press the keys for selection. an option. 3 Select zz Turn the <6> or <5> dial, or press the keys to change the setting. There are also functions that are set by pressing a button following these operations.
2 Shooting This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on the shooting ([z]) tab. zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], or [BULB] mode.
2 -1 Shooting Still Photos [Shooting Mode] Settings for Still Photos To prepare for still photo shooting, press the button, then press the button to access the [Shooting mode] screen at left. [A] : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.123) [t] : Flexible-priority AE (p.140) [d] : Program AE (p.132) [s] : Shutter-priority AE (p.134) [f] : Aperture-priority AE (p.136) [a] : Manual exposure (p.138) [BULB] : Bulb (p.158) [w/x/y] : Custom shooting mode (p.
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting zzShooting 1 p.75 p.78 p.80 p.118 p.118 zzShooting 2 p.110 p.179 zzShooting 3 p.155 p.85 p.104 p.109 p.119 p.
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting zzShooting 4 p.97 p.100 p.102 p.117 p.88, 92, 95 zzShooting 5 p.107 p.105 p.121 p.130 p.166 p.161 zzShooting 6 p.159 p.115 p.151 p.150 p.
Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting In [A] mode, the following screen is displayed. zzShooting 1 p.75 p.78 p.118 p.118 p.130 p.
Index to Features: Still Photo Shooting Shooting Modes zz [A] mode B p.123 zz [t] mode B p.140 zz [d] mode B p.132 zz [s] mode B p.134 zz [f] mode B p.136 zz [a] mode B p.138 zz [BULB] mode B p.158 Menus/Shooting Features zz Exposure simulation B p.120 zz Dust Delete Data B p.121 zz Touch Shutter B p.130 zz Drive mode B p.144 zz Self-timer B p.147 zz Silent LV shooting B p.150 zz Silent shutter B p.151 zz Metering mode B p.152 zz Exposure compensation B p.
Setting Image Quality You can select the pixel count and the image quality. JPEG image quality options include 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, and b. RAW image quality options include 1 and F. 1 Select [z1: Image quality]. the image quality. 2 Set zz To select the RAW quality, turn the <6> dial, and to select the JPEG quality, press the keys. zz Press <0> to set it.
Setting Image Quality RAW Images A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the quality as follows: 1 or F. F produces RAW images with smaller file sizes than 1. RAW images can be processed using [31: RAW image processing] (p.339) and saved as JPEG images. (Just as for 1, all JPEG size options are available for F.
Setting Image Quality Guidelines for Choosing Image Quality For guidelines on file sizes, number of possible shots, and maximum burst shots, see page 609. Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting The approximate maximum burst is displayed at the upper left of the shooting screen and lower right of the viewfinder. If the maximum burst for continuous shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be displayed. If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99 or more shots continuously.
Setting Up Dual Pixel RAW Shooting Shooting 1 or F images with this feature enabled produces special, Dual Pixel RAW images containing dual pixel information from the image sensor. This is called Dual Pixel RAW shooting. When processing these images in Digital Photo Professional software for EOS cameras, you can take advantage of the Dual Pixel data to fine-tune sharpness (using depth information), shift the camera viewpoint slightly, and reduce ghosting.
Setting Up Dual Pixel RAW Shooting the picture. 4 Take ggA RAW image containing Dual Pixel data (Dual Pixel RAW image) is captured. ooStartup takes longer when the power switch is set to <1> or the camera resumes operation from auto power off. ooContinuous shooting speed is slower when you shoot with Dual Pixel RAW (p.144). Maximum burst also decreases. oo drive mode is not available. Setting the mode to has the effect of setting it to . ooNoise may be more noticeable in RAW or RAW+JPEG images.
Setting Cropping/Aspect RatioN Normally with RF or EF lenses, images are captured at the sensor size of approx. 36.0 x 24.0 mm in full-frame shooting, but in cropped shooting, you can isolate and magnify the center of the image approx. 1.6x (APS-C size) as if using a telephoto lens, or you can set an aspect ratio to suit your shooting application before shooting. For EF-S lenses, a 3:2 aspect ratio in the center is captured, magnified approx. 1.6x (APS-C size). [z1: zCropping/aspect 1 Select ratio].
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio Setting examples Y set U set or EF-S lens used the picture. 4 Take zz When [1.6x (crop)] is set or an EF-S lens is used, an image magnified approx. 1.6x is displayed. zz When [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set, the image within the black masked or outlined area is captured.
Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio ooAreas outside the cropped area are not recorded in RAW shooting when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses. oo[Shooting area] has no effect on display when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses. oo[85: Add cropping information] is only available when [Full-frame] is set. ooThe [z1: zCropping/aspect ratio] setting is not used as the basis for auto flash zoom (auto flash coverage adjustment) by an external Speedlite.
i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In [A] mode, ISO speed is set automatically (p.608). Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see page 614. the button (9). 1 Press zz With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. the ISO speed item. 2 Select zz Turn the <5> dial to select the ISO speed item. the ISO speed. 3 Set zz Turn the <6> dial to set it.
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos ISO Speed Guide zz Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of camera/subject shake or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of field), in some shooting conditions. zz High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper depth of field), and longer flash range but may increase image noise. ooAs H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). 1 Select [z3: zISO speed settings]. 2 Select [ISO speed range]. the minimum limit. 3 Set zz Select the minimum limit box, then press <0>. zz Select the ISO speed, then press <0>.
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100–40000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100–25600, and the maximum limit within ISO 200–40000. 1 Select [Auto range]. the minimum limit. 2 Set zz Select the minimum limit box, then press <0>. zz Select the ISO speed, then press <0>. the maximum limit. 3 Set zz Select the maximum limit box, then press <0>. zz Select the ISO speed, then press <0>.
Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set. This is effective in [d] and [f] modes when shooting moving subjects with a wide-angle lens, or when using a telephoto lens. It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects. 1 Select [Min. shutter spd.]. Automatically set the desired minimum shutter 2 Set speed.
Selecting a Picture StyleN Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject. In [A] mode, [D] (Auto) is set automatically. 1 Select [z4: Picture Style]. a Picture Style. 2 Select zz Select a Picture Style, then press <0>.
Selecting a Picture Style Picture Style Characteristics zz[D] Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style. zz[P] Standard The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose Picture Style suitable for most scenes. zz[Q] Portrait For nice skin tones.
Selecting a Picture Style zz[U] Faithful Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation. zz[V] Monochrome Creates black-and-white images. Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG images shot with the [Monochrome] Picture Style.
Selecting a Picture Style Symbols The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness], or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other settings. The numbers indicate the values for these settings specified for the respective Picture Style.
Customizing a Picture StyleN You can customize the Picture Styles. You can adjust Picture Style settings such as [Contrast] or [Sharpness] ([Strength], [Fineness], and [Threshold]). To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 94. 1 Select [z4: Picture Style]. a Picture Style. 2 Select zz Select the Picture Style to adjust, then press the button. an item. 3 Select zz Select an item (such as [Strength] in [Sharpness]), then press <0>.
Customizing a Picture Style the item. 4 Adjust zz Adjust the effect level, then press <0>. zz Press the button to save the adjusted setting and return to the Picture Style selection screen. ggAny settings you change from default values are displayed in blue.
Customizing a Picture Style [V] Monochrome Adjustment Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as [Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect]. [k] Filter effect With a filter effect applied to a monochrome image, you can make white clouds or green trees stand out more. Filter N: None Sample Effects Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Registering a Picture StyleN You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with different settings. Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS software) can also be modified here. 1 Select [z4: Picture Style]. [User Def. *]. 2 Select zz Select [User Def. *], then press the button. <0>.
Registering a Picture Style an item. 5 Select zz Select an item (such as [Strength] in [Sharpness]), then press <0>. the item. 6 Adjust zz Adjust the effect level, then press <0>. zz For details, see “Customizing a Picture Style” (p.92). zz Press the button to save the adjusted setting and return to the Picture Style selection screen. ggThe base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [User Def. *]. ggBlue style names indicate that you have changed the settings from default values.
B: Setting the White BalanceN White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object. In [A] mode, [Q] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. the button (9).
Setting the White Balance (Approx.) Display Q Qw W E R Y U D O P Mode Auto (Ambience priority, p.99) Auto (White priority, p.99) Daylight Shade Cloudy, twilight, sunset Tungsten light White fluorescent light Flash use Custom (p.100) Color temperature (p.101) Color Temperature (K: Kelvin) 3000–7000 5200 7000 6000 3200 4000 Automatically set* 2000–10000 2500–10000 * Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function. Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
Setting the White Balance [Q] Auto White Balance With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity of the image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image’s warm color cast. If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS DIGITAL camera models, select [Q] (Ambience priority). 1 Select [z4: White balance]. [Q]. 2 Select zz With [Q] selected, press the button. an item.
Setting the White Balance [O] Custom White Balance With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot. a white object. 1 Shoot zz Aim the camera at a plain white subject, so that white fills the screen. zz Focus manually and shoot with the standard exposure set for the white object. zz You can use any of the white balance settings.
Setting the White Balance ooIf the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained. ooThe following images cannot be selected: Images captured with the Picture Style set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure images, cropped images, and images shot with another camera. Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or standard 18% gray reflector (commercially available).
u White Balance CorrectionN You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels. This function is for advanced users who understand the use of color temperature conversion and color compensating filters and their effects. White Balance Correction 1 Select [z4: WB Shift/Bkt.]. the white balance correction.
White Balance Correction White Balance Auto Bracketing With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias and magenta/green bias. This function is called white balance bracketing (WB Bkt.). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments. B/A bias ±3 levels Set the white balance bracketing amount.
Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or contrast is too low or high. This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. In [A] mode, [Standard] is set automatically. [z3: Auto Lighting 1 Select Optimizer]. a correction option. 2 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>. the picture. 3 Take ggThe image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected as necessary.
Setting Noise ReductionN High ISO Speed Noise Reduction This function reduces the noise generated in the image. It is especially effective at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced. 1 Select [z5: High ISO speed NR]. the level. 2 Set zz Select the desired noise reduction level, then press <0>. zz[M] Multi Shot Noise Reduction Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
Setting Noise Reduction Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction ooIf there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise reduction effect may become smaller. ooIf you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended. ooIf you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages. ooAuto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
Setting Noise Reduction Long Exposure Noise Reduction For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced. [z5: Long exp. noise 1 Select reduction]. a reduction option. 2 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>. zz[AUTO] Auto For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto] setting is effective enough in most cases.
Setting Noise Reduction ooWith [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. ooImages may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting. oo[BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not displayed until processing is finished, when you can shoot again.
Highlight Tone PriorityN You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights. 1 Select [z3: Highlight tone priority]. an option. 2 Set zz [Enable]: Improves gradation in highlights. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother. zz [Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed highlights even more than [Enable], under some shooting conditions. the picture.
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the optical characteristics of the lens. Image distortion due to optical characteristics of the lens is called distortion. Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. And decreased image sharpness due to the aperture is called diffraction phenomenon. These lens aberrations can be corrected.
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics [Enable]. 3 Select zz Confirm that the name of the attached lens and (except for diffraction correction) [Correction data available] are displayed. zz Select [Enable], then press <0>. the picture. 4 Take zz The image captured will have lens aberration corrected. Peripheral Illumination Correction ooDepending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery. ooThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics Digital Lens Optimizer ooDepending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed before shooting. ooThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be. ooFor movie shooting, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is not possible.
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics Chromatic Aberration Correction [Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is enabled. Diffraction Correction ooDepending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the effects of correction. ooThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be. ooFor movie shooting, [Diffraction correction] will not appear. (Correction is not possible.
Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics Lens Correction Data The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered (stored) in the camera. With [Enable] selected, the peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, Digital Lens Optimizer, chromatic aberration correction, and diffraction correction will be applied automatically. For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to register the correction data to the camera.
Reducing FlickerN If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result. This feature enables the camera to detect the flickering frequency and take pictures when exposure and colors are less affected by flickering. 1 Select [z6: Anti-flicker shoot.].
Reducing Flicker ooIn the [t], [d], or [f] mode, if the shutter speed changes during continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different shutter speeds, the color tone may become inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent color tones, use [t], [s], or [a] mode at a fixed shutter speed. ooColor tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable]. ooShutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed may change when you start shooting (even with AE lock).
Setting the Color SpaceN The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended. In [A] mode, [sRGB] is set automatically. 1 Select [z4: Color space]. a color space option. 2 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>. Adobe RGB This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses.
Card Reminder You can set the camera not to shoot unless there is a card in the camera. The default setting is [Enable]. [z1: Release shutter 1 Select without card]. [Disable]. 2 Select zz Select [Disable], then press <0>. Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the screen immediately after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set [Hold]. To not have the captured image displayed, set [Off]. 1 Select [z1: Image review]. a time option.
Setting the Metering TimerN You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the duration of exposure display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action such as pressing the shutter button halfway. 1 Select [z3: Metering timer]. a time option. 2 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>.
Exposure SimulationN Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness (exposure) of the actual image will look. 1 Select [z3: Expo. simulation]. an option. 2 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>. zzEnable (g) The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly. zzDuring e Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see (E).
Appending Dust Delete DataN Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that may be visible on captured images. However, for the case where visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots automatically. Preparation zz Use an RF or EF lens. zz Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
Appending Dust Delete Data a solid-white object. 3 Shoot zz At a distance of 20–30 cm (0.7–1.0 ft.), fill the screen with a patternless, solidwhite object and take a picture. zz Since the image will not be saved, the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera. ggWhen the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will appear. zz If the data is not obtained successfully, an error message will appear.
AFully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) [A] is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of the subject (p.126). the shooting mode to [A]. 1 Set zz Press the button. zz Turn the <6> dial to select [A], then press <0>. the camera at what you will 2 Aim shoot (the subject).
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ggFor moving subjects, the AF point is displayed in blue and tracks subject movement. The camera does not beep. (Servo AF) the picture. 4 Take zz Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. ggThe image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the screen. Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.
Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) FAQ zzFocusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point). Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway (p.56). If you are too close to the subject, move away and shoot again. zzMultiple AF points are displayed simultaneously. If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these positions are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the subject, you can take the picture.
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective. In the [A] mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) Scene Icons In the [A] shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For icon details, see page 623.
Information Display (Still Photo Shooting) For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see page 619. ooWhen is displayed in white, it indicates that the image is displayed at the brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured. ooIf is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting.
Cautions for Still Photo Shooting ooDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. oo“General Still Photo Shooting Cautions” are on pages 142–143. Notes for Still Photo Shooting ooThe image’s field of view coverage is approx. 100% (with image quality set to JPEG 73).
x Shooting with the Touch Shutter Just by tapping on the screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically. the Touch Shutter. 1 Enable zz Tap [y] on the screen’s bottom left. Each time you tap on the icon, it will toggle between [y] and [x]. zz [x] (Touch Shutter: Enable) The camera will focus on the spot you tap on, then the picture will be taken. zz [y] (Touch Shutter: Disable) You can tap on a spot to perform focusing on the spot. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.
Shooting with the Touch Shutter ooEven if you set the drive mode to or , the camera will still shoot in the single shooting mode. ooEven if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will focus on the image with [One-Shot AF]. ooTapping on the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture. ooIf you shoot by tapping on the screen with [z1: Image review] set to [Hold], you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.
d: Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE. * [d] stands for Program. * AE stands for Auto Exposure. 1 Set the shooting mode to [d]. on the subject. 2 Focus zz Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. ggOnce the subject is in focus, the AF point turns green (with One-Shot AF). ggThe shutter speed and aperture are set automatically. the display.
Program AE ooIf the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO speed or use flash. ooIf the “1/8000” shutter speed and the highest f/number blink, it indicates overexposure. Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the lens. Differences Between [d] and [A] Modes ooIn [A] mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots.
s: Shutter-Priority AE In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion. * [s] stands for Time value. Blurred motion (Slow speed: 1/30 sec.) Frozen motion (Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.) 1 Set the shooting mode to [s].
Shutter-Priority AE ooIf the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed. ooIf the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed. Shutter Speed Display ooFor example, “1/125” or “125” indicates 1/125 sec. Additionally, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15 sec.
f: Aperture-Priority AE In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.
Aperture-Priority AE ooIf the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed. ooIf the “1/8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed. Aperture Value Display The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be.
a: Manual Exposure In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a commercially available exposure meter. This method is called manual exposure. * [a] stands for Manual. 1 Set the shooting mode to [a]. 2 Set the ISO speed (p.83). zz With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation (p.139). the shutter speed and aperture. 3 Set zz To set the shutter speed, turn the <6> dial.
Manual Exposure Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can set exposure compensation (p.154) as follows: ●●Touch the exposure level indicator ●●[z3: Expo.comp./AEB] ●●Quick Control screen If ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the standard exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore, you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the exposure compensation.
t: Flexible-Priority AE In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed manually or automatically and combine these settings with your choice of exposure compensation. Shooting in [t] mode, with control over each of these parameters, is equivalent to shooting in [d], [s], [f], or [a] mode. * [t] stands for Flexible value. 1 Set the shooting mode to [t]. the shutter speed, aperture, and 2 Set ISO speed. zz Turn the <5> dial to select an item to set.
Flexible-Priority AE Combinations of Functions in [t] Mode Shutter Speed Aperture [AUTO] [AUTO] Manual selection [AUTO] [AUTO] Manual selection Manual selection Manual selection ISO Speed [AUTO] Manual selection [AUTO] Manual selection [AUTO] Manual selection [AUTO] Manual selection Exposure Compensation Shooting Mode Available Similar to [d] Available Similar to [s] Available Similar to [f] Available – Similar to [a] ooBlinking values indicate that the values set will cause underexpos
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions Image Quality ooWhen you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may become noticeable. ooShooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image. ooContinuous shooting over an extended period may cause the camera’s internal temperature to rise and affect image quality. Stop shooting occasionally. ooIf you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is high, image quality may decline.
General Still Photo Shooting Cautions Images and Display ooUnder low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image. ooUnder low light, noise may be noticeable in image display even at low ISO speeds, but there will be less noise in your shots, because image quality varies between display and captured images. ooThe screen or exposure value may flicker if the light source (lighting) changes.
i Selecting the Drive Mode Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject. the button (9). 1 Press zz With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. the drive mode item. 2 Select zz Turn the <5> dial to select the drive mode item. the drive mode. 3 Select zz Turn the <6> dial to make a selection. zz[u] Single shooting When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.
Selecting the Drive Mode With Servo AF shooting: When [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], the continuous shooting speed of max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec. will be given priority. In flash photography: With EL or EX series Speedlites, the continuous shooting speed will be max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. zz[i] Low-speed continuous shooting When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. while you keep holding it down.
Selecting the Drive Mode ooApprox. 8.0 shots/sec. is the maximum high-speed continuous shooting speed (p.144) under these conditions: shooting with a fully charged battery in One-Shot AF mode at a 1/1000 sec. or faster shutter speed and maximum aperture (depending on the lens*), at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), with flicker reduction, Dual Pixel RAW shooting, and Digital Lens Optimizer disabled.
j Using the Self-Timer Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph. the button (9). 1 Press zz With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. the drive mode item. 2 Select zz Turn the <5> dial to select the drive mode item. the self-timer. 3 Select zz Turn the <6> dial to select the selftimer. m: Shoot in 10 sec. l: Shoot in 2 sec. zz are displayed when the camera is paired with a wireless remote control (sold separately, p.174).
Using the Self-Timer oo enables you to shoot without touching the camera mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake if you shoot still lifes or long exposures. ooAfter taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.304) to check focus and exposure is recommended. ooWhen using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.126) on an object at the same distance as where you will stand. ooTo cancel the self-timer after it starts, press <0>.
Selecting the Display Speed for High-Speed Continuous ShootingN High-speed display that switches between your shot and the live image is available when shooting with an RF lens, with [21: AF operation] set to [Servo AF], and with the drive mode set to [High speed continuous]. Display is more responsive, making it easier to follow fast-moving subjects. Select [z6: 1 display]. High speed an item. 2 Select zz Select [Enable] for display that switches between each continuous shot and the live image.
Silent Live View ShootingN You can adjust the camera’s drive and shutter operating characteristics to suit shooting conditions or the lens used. 1 Select [z6: Silent LV shoot.]. an option. 2 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>. zzMode 1 Enables quieter shooting than with [Disable]. Continuous shooting is also possible. zzMode 2 When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the camera operation will be suspended.
Silent ShootingN You can shoot silently, using the sensor’s electronic shutter feature, instead of with the mechanical shutter normally used in still photo shooting. This is useful when shooting where the camera must be quiet. Available in , , or drive mode. 1 Select [z6: Silent shutter]. 2 Select [Enable]. the picture. 3 Take ggAs you shoot, a white frame is momentarily displayed around the screen. ooBe responsible when using silent shooting, and respect subject privacy and portrait rights.
q Selecting the Metering ModeN You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness. In [A] mode, evaluative metering is set automatically. the button (7). 1 Press zz With an image displayed, press the button. the metering mode. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select the item. zz Press the keys to select the metering mode.
Selecting the Metering Mode ooBy default, the camera will set the exposure as follows. With [q] (Evaluative metering), holding down the shutter button halfway will lock the exposure setting (AE lock) after focus is achieved with OneShot AF. In the [w] (Partial metering), [r] (Spot metering), and [e] (Center-weighted average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.) ooWith [82: Meter.
O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera. Exposure compensation can be set in the [t], [d], [s], [f], and [a] shooting modes. You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments. For details on exposure compensation when [a] mode and ISO Auto are both set, see page 139, and see page 140 for [t] mode. the exposure.
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N By changing the shutter speed, aperture, or ISO speed automatically, you can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three consecutive shots. This is called AEB. * AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing. 1 Select [z3: Expo.comp./AEB]. the AEB range. 2 Set zz Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB (1) Standard exposure Decreased exposure Increased exposure range (1). By pressing the keys, you can set the exposure compensation amount.
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) If [z3: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.104) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced. oo blinks in the lower left of the screen during AEB shooting. ooIf the drive mode is set to , press the shutter button three times for each shot. When or is set and you hold down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively and the camera will automatically stop shooting.
A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)N You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc. on the subject. 1 Focus zz Press the shutter button halfway. ggThe exposure setting will be displayed. the button (4).
BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. This photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long exposures. 1 Set the shooting mode to [BULB]. the desired aperture. 2 Set zz Turn the <6> dial to set it. the picture.
Long (Bulb) Exposures ooWith [z5: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated during long exposures (p.107). ooFor bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended. ooYou can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately, p.176). ooYou can also use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.174) for bulb exposures. When you press the remote control’s transmit button, the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later.
Long (Bulb) Exposures the desired exposure time. 3 Set zz Select the hour, minute, or second. zz Press <0> to display . zz Set the desired number, then press <0>. (Returns to .) 4 Select [OK]. the picture. 5 Take ggPress the shutter button completely, and the bulb exposure will start and continue until the set time elapses. zz [H] and the exposure time are displayed on the LCD panel during bulb timer shooting. zz To cancel the timer setting, set [Disable] in step 2.
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots. With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image. * HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting Effects zz[P] Natural For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced. zz[A] Art standard While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting a [Continuous HDR] option. 4 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>. zz With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends. zz With [Every shot], HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 2 is set to [Disable HDR]. [Auto Image Align]. 5 Set zz For handheld shooting, select [Enable]. When using a tripod, select [Disable], then press <0>. the images to save.
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting ooRAW HDR images are captured in JPEG73 image quality. RAW+JPEG HDR images are captured in the specified JPEG image quality. The three images captured to create an HDR image are also in the specified image quality. ooHDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (L, H1, H2). HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100–40000 (varies depending on the settings of [Minimum] and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]). ooThe flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting ooWhen shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], AF point display information (p.309) and Dust Delete Data (p.121) will not be appended to the image. ooIf you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be slightly lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect.
P Multiple ExposuresN As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can see how the images will be merged into a single image. 1 Select [z5: Multiple exposure]. a [Multiple exposure] option. 2 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>. zz To exit shooting multiple exposures, select [Disable]. zzOn: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority) Convenient when shooting multiple exposures gradually as you check the results. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
Multiple Exposures [Multi-expos ctrl]. 3 Set zz Select the desired multiple-exposure control method, then press <0>. zzAdditive The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively. Based on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure compensation amount. Exposure Compensation Setting Guide by Number of Exposures Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures: -2 stops zzAverage Based on the [No.
Multiple Exposures the images to save. 5 Specify zz To save all single exposures and the multiple-exposure image, select [All images] and press <0>. zz To save only the multiple-exposure image, select [Result only] and press <0>. a [Continue Mult-exp] option. 6 Set zz Select an option, then press <0>. zz With [1 shot only], multipleexposure shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends.
Multiple Exposures the next exposures. 8 Shoot zz When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, images captured so far are displayed merged. To display only the current image, press the button repeatedly. zz Multiple-exposure shooting will end when the set number of exposures are taken. ooWith [On:Func/Ctrl], you can press the button to view the multiple-exposure images so far or delete the previous single exposure (p.172).
Multiple Exposures ooThe image quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will also be set for the subsequent exposures. ooIf [z4: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting. ooWith [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive] set, any noise, irregular colors, banding, or similar issues affecting images displayed as you shoot may look different in the final multiple-exposure image.
Multiple Exposures Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card You can select a RAW image recorded on the card as the first single exposure. The image data of the selected RAW image will remain intact. Only 1 or F images can be used. JPEG images cannot be selected. Images you can specify also vary depending on the lens attached. For details, see the table below. 1 Select [Select image for multi. expo.]. the first image.
Multiple Exposures ooThe ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color space, etc. set for the first image will also be applied for the subsequent images. ooIf Picture Style is [Auto] for the image selected as the first image, [Standard] will be applied for shooting. ooYou cannot select an image taken with another camera. oo [Select image for multi. expo.] is not available unless a lens is attached. ooYou can also select a RAW image used in multiple-exposure shooting.
Multiple Exposures FAQ zzAre there any restrictions on the image quality? All single exposures and the multiple-exposure image are captured at your specified image quality. All JPEG image quality settings can be selected. zzCan I merge images recorded on the card? With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.171). Note that you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
Remote Control Shooting Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) compatible with Bluetooth® low energy technology enables remote control shooting up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. Pairing To use BR-E1, you must first pair (connect and register) the camera and remote control. For pairing instructions, see page 408. Do the following after the devices are paired. the button (9). 1 Press zz With an image displayed on the screen, press the button. the drive mode item.
Remote Control Shooting the picture. 4 Take zz By pressing the <2> button on the remote control, you can also autofocus. zz To shoot, press the release button on the remote control. zz For detailed shooting instructions, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual. You cannot use infrared remote control units such as Remote Controller RC-6. ooIf focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually before shooting (p.281). ooAuto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote shooting.
Using a Remote Switch You can shoot by connecting Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately). For operating instructions, refer to the remote switch instruction manual. 1 Open the terminal cover. the plug to the remote 2 Connect control terminal.
D Flash Photography EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras Using an EL/EX series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography easy. For operation procedures, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite’s Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features of EL/EX series Speedlites. To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s menu screen, see page 179. zz Flash exposure compensation You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation).
Flash Photography Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series zz With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only. Set the camera’s shooting mode to [a] manual exposure or [f] aperture-priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before shooting. zz When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual flash mode.
Setting the Flash FunctionN With an EL/EX series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions. For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual. [z2: External Speedlite 1 Select control]. an item. 2 Select zz Select an item, then press <0>.
Setting the Flash Function Flash Firing To enable flash photography, set to [Enable]. To disable flash firing or enable only the AF-assist beam, set to [Disable]. When a Speedlite is attached that supports auto flash firing, you can also configure the following settings to enable automatic firing as needed for shooting conditions. ●●Set [Flash firing] to [Enable]. ●●Set the Speedlite to automatic flash mode. ●●Set the camera shooting mode to [A] or [d].
Setting the Flash Function Slow Synchro You can set the flash-sync speed for flash photography in [f] aperturepriority AE mode or [d] Program AE mode. zz[ ] 1/200-30sec. auto zz[ ] 1/200-1/60sec. auto zz[ ] 1/200 sec. (fixed) The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. Slow-sync shooting is used under some shooting conditions, in low-light locations, and shutter speed is automatically lowered.
Setting the Flash Function Safety FE To avoid overexposure from the flash firing during the day or at close range, the camera can automatically lower the ISO speed and shoot with standard subject exposure when set to ISO Auto. Flash Function Settings The information displayed, position of display, and available options vary depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings, the flash mode, and other factors.
Setting the Flash Function zzFlash mode You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash photography. [E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard mode of EL/EX series Speedlites for automatic flash photography. [Manual flash] is for setting the Speedlite’s [Flash output level] yourself. [CSP] (continuous shooting priority mode) automatically decreases flash output by one stop and increases ISO speed by one stop. Useful in continuous shooting, and helps conserve flash battery power.
Setting the Flash Function zzWireless functions / Flash ratio control Wireless (multiple) flash photography is possible with radio or optical transmission. For details on wireless flash, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with wireless flash photography. With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.) compatible with flash function settings, you can set the flash ratio between flash tubes or flash heads A and B, or use wireless flash with additional receiver units.
Setting the Flash Function zzShutter synchronization Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash fires immediately after the exposure starts. If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired right before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.
Setting the Flash Function zzFlash exposure compensation You can set flash exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments. For details, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual. If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
Setting the Flash Function Flash Custom Function Settings For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s (sold separately) Instruction Manual. 1 Select [Flash C.Fn settings]. the desired functions. 2 Set zz Select the number, then press <0>. zz Select an option, then press <0>. ooWith an EL/EX series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always fire at full output if the [Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL] (autoflash). ooThe Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.
2 -2 Shooting Movies [Shooting Mode] Settings for Movies To prepare for movie shooting, press the button, then press the button to access the [Shooting mode] screen at left. [y] [k] [t] [v] [M] [ / : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.209) : Program AE (p.209) : Shutter-priority AE (p.210) : Aperture-priority AE (p.211) : Manual exposure (p.213) / ]: Custom shooting mode (p.417) You can also shoot movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo shooting.
Tab Menus: Movie Shooting zzShooting 1 p.192 p.219 p.202 p.205 p.220 zzShooting 2 p.245 p.224 p.245 zzShooting 3 p.246 p.246 p.247 p.247 p.248 p.249 p.
Tab Menus: Movie Shooting zzShooting 4 p.250 p.250 p.250 p.250 p.236 p.250 p.251 In [y] mode, the following screens are displayed. zzShooting 1 p.192 p.202 p.205 p.220 zzShooting 2 p.224 p.245 p.
Index to Features: Movie Shooting Shooting Mode zz [y] [k] modes B p.209 zz [t] mode B p.210 zz [v] mode B p.211 zz [M] mode B p.213 Menus/Shooting Features zz Movie recording quality B p.192 zz 24.00p B p.198 zz High Frame Rate B p.199 zz Sound recording B p.202 zz Time code B p.205 zz Movie cropping B p.219 zz Movie digital IS B p.220 zz HDR movie B p.222 zz Time-lapse movie B p.224 zz Canon Log B p.236 zz Lens aberration correction B p.245 zz Remote control shooting B p.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality Under the [z1: Movie rec quality] tab, select [Movie rec. size] to set the image size, frame rate, and compression method. The movie will be recorded as an MP4 file. The frame rate displayed on the [Movie rec. size] screen switches automatically depending on the [53: Video system] setting (p.384). The card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies (card performance requirements) vary depending on the movie recording quality.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality ooIf you change the [53: Video system] setting, also set [z1: Movie rec quality] again. ooNormal playback of 4K, L8/7, and High Frame Rate movies, for example, may not be possible on other devices, because playback is processing-intensive. ooSharpness and noise vary slightly depending on movie recording quality, cropped shooting settings, and the lens used.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality Movie-Recording Coverage Image sensor coverage for movies varies depending on movie recording quality and cropped shooting settings and the lens used. With EF-S lenses, movies are cropped around the center of the image.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality zzFrame rate (fps: frame per second) [2] 119.9fps/[8] 59.94fps/[6] 29.97fps For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). For 2, see page 199. [3] 100.0fps/[7] 50.00fps/[5] 25.00fps For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.). For 3, see page 199. [4] 23.98fps/[B] 24.00fps Mainly for motion pictures. 4 (23.98fps) is available when [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC]. For B, see page 198.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality zzMovie recording format [C] MP4 All movies you shoot with the camera are recorded as movie files in MP4 format (file extension “.MP4”). This file format provides higher compatibility for playback than with MOV.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality Cards that Can Record Movies For details on cards that can record at each level of movie recording quality, see page 611. When shooting movies, use a high-capacity card with a writing/reading speed (as specified in card performance requirements) shown in the table on page 611 or higher than the standard specification. Test the card by taking a few movies in the desired quality (p.192) and make sure the card can properly record the movie.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality 24.00p Records movies at a frame rate of 24.00 fps. When [Enable] is set, you can select the movie recording quality as follows: HBW, HBX, LBW, or LBX. If you set [Movie rec. size] before setting [24.00p] to [Enable], set [Movie rec. size] again. Precautions on [24.00p: Enable] ooHDMI video output is 2160/24.00p or 1080/24.00p, depending on your specified movie recording quality.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality High Frame Rate You can shoot HD movies at a high frame rate of 119.9 fps or 100.0 fps. This is ideal for shooting movies that will be played back in slow motion. The maximum recording time per movie is 7 min. 29 sec. Movies are recorded as w2W or w3W. Movie Servo AF and Movie digital IS have no effect when you shoot High Frame Rate movies. Also during High Frame Rate movie shooting, AF is not used in focusing. Sound is not recorded in High Frame Rate movies.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting without interruption. zzUsing SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format it in FAT32. With a FAT32-formatted card, if you shoot a movie and the file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically. When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie file individually.
Setting the Movie Recording Quality Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute For details on file sizes and the recording time available at each level of recording quality, see page 612. Movie Shooting Time Limit zzWhen shooting non-High Frame Rate movies The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once 29 min. 59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start shooting a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the movie as a new file).
Setting the Sound Recording You can shoot movies while recording sound with the built-in stereo microphone or an external stereo microphone. You can also freely adjust the soundrecording level. Use [z1: Sound recording] to set sound recording functions. Audio is recorded in LPCM format for movies with ALL-I compression and AAC for movies with IPB compression. Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level zzAuto The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.
Setting the Sound Recording Attenuator Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for shooting, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended. zzUsing a microphone Normally, the camera’s built-in microphone records in stereo. If an external stereo microphone equipped with a miniature stereo plug (3.
Setting the Sound Recording ooSounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication function is not recommended. ooWhen connecting an external microphone or headphones to the camera, be sure to insert the plug all the way in. ooThe camera’s built-in microphone will also record the operation sound and mechanical sound of the camera during shooting.
Setting the Time Code As movies are recorded, a time code is also recorded automatically to keep track of the time for synchronization. Time codes are constantly recorded in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. They are mainly used when movies are edited. To set up the time code, use [z1: Time code]. Count Up zzRec run The time code advances only while you are shooting movies. The initial time code value in each movie file captured continues from the value in the previous file.
Setting the Time Code Movie Recording Count You can select how time is displayed on the movie shooting screen. zzRec time Displays the time that has elapsed since you started shooting the movie. zzTime code Displays the time code during movie recording. Movie Playback Count You can select how time is displayed on the movie playback screen. zzRec time Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback. zzTime code Displays the time code during movie playback.
Setting the Time Code HDMI zzTime code Time codes can be added to movies as you record them to an external device via HDMI. Off No time code is added to HDMI video output. On Adds a time code to HDMI video output. When [On] is set, [Rec Command] is displayed. zzRecord Command For HDMI video output recorded by an external device, you can synchronize recording to when you start and stop shooting the movie on the camera. Off Recording is started and stopped by the external device.
Setting the Time Code Drop Frame The time code will not match the actual time when frames are counted in the time code if the frame rate is set to 2 (119.9 fps), 8 (59.94 fps), or 6 (29.97 fps). The discrepancy is corrected automatically when [Enable] is set. This correction function is called “drop frame”. It is intended for use in movie editing or other applications by advanced users. zzEnable Corrects the discrepancy automatically by skipping time code numbers (DF: drop frame).
k Shooting Movies y/k Autoexposure Shooting When the shooting mode is set to [y] or [k], autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. the shooting mode to [y] or 1 Set [k]. zz Press the button. zz Turn the <6> dial to select [y] or [k]. on the subject. 2 Focus zz Before shooting a movie, focus with AF or manual focus (p.268ꟷ275, 281). zz By default, [21: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] so that the camera always keeps focusing (p.286).
Shooting Movies t Shutter-Priority AE [t] mode enables you to set your preferred shutter speed for movies. ISO speed and aperture are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard exposure. 1 Set the shooting mode to [t]. the desired shutter speed (1). 2 Set zz Turn the <6> dial as you watch the screen. zz The settable shutter speeds vary depending on the frame rate. (1) and shoot the movie. 3 Focus zz The procedure is the same as steps 2 and 3 for “Autoexposure Shooting” (p.209).
Shooting Movies v Aperture-Priority AE [v] mode enables you to set your preferred aperture for movies. ISO speed and shutter speed are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard exposure. 1 Set the shooting mode to [v]. the desired aperture (1). 2 Set zz Turn the <6> dial as you watch the screen. (1) and shoot the movie. 3 Focus zz The procedure is the same as steps 2 and 3 for “Autoexposure Shooting” (p.209).
Shooting Movies Notes for [y], [k], [t], and [v] Modes ooIn the [y] mode, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.623). ooYou can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the button (except in the [A] mode, p.157). After applying AE lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the button.
Shooting Movies M Manual Exposure Shooting You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users. 1 Set the shooting mode to [M]. the ISO speed. 2 Set zz Press the button. zz Turn the <5> dial to select the ISO speed item. zz Turn the <6> dial to set it. the shutter speed (1) and 3 Set aperture (2). zz Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator.
Shooting Movies ooFor movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to ISO 50). ooWhen switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the camera settings again before shooting movies. ooDuring movie shooting, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture. Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise at high ISO speeds. ooWhen shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended.
Shooting Movies ISO Speed in [M] Mode In [M] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually or select [AUTO] to set it automatically. For details on the ISO speed, see page 614. Shutter Speed Available shutter speeds in [t] (shutter-priority AE) and [M] (manual exposure) modes vary depending on the frame rate of your specified movie recording quality. Frame Rate 2 3 8 7 Normal Movie Shooting – Shutter Speed (sec.
Shooting Movies Still Photo Shooting Still photos cannot be taken during movie shooting. To take still photos, stop recording and change the [Shooting mode] setting to still photos (p.70) first. Information Display (Movie Shooting) For details on the icons displayed for movie shooting, see page 621.
Cautions for Movie Shooting ooDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. ooIf you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result. ooIf or is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie shooting, the white balance may also change. ooIf you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may flicker.
Notes for Movie Shooting ooEach time you shoot a movie, a new movie file is created on the card. ooThe movie’s field of view coverage for shooting 4K, Full HD, and HD movies is approx. 100%. ooYou can also focus by pressing the
button. ooTo enable starting or stopping movie shooting by pressing the shutter button completely, set [Fully-press] for [54: V btn function] to [Start/ stop mov rec]. ooStereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.209).
Movie CroppingN With RF or EF lenses, movies can be cropped around the center of the image, as if using a telephoto lens. Shooting movies with EF-S lenses has the same effect as this movie cropping feature. 1 Select [z1: Movie cropping]. [Enable]. 2 Select ggThe center area is magnified. ooL8W, L8X, L7W, L7X and High Frame Rate movies cannot be shot with movie cropping. ooThe center of the screen is further cropped, reducing the shooting area, when [z1: Movie digital IS] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].
Movie Digital IS In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake during movie shooting. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. With Movie digital IS, images can be stabilized even when using a lens without Image Stabilizer. When using a lens with built-in optical Image Stabilizer, set the lens’s Image Stabilizer switch to <1>. 1 Select [z1: Movie digital IS]. 2 Select an item. zzDisable (v) Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.
Movie Digital IS Combination IS Even more effective correction is possible by shooting movies with Movie digital IS and a Combination IS-compatible lens, which will combine optical and digital image stabilization by the lens and camera. ooMovie digital IS will not function when the lens’s optical Imager Stabilizer switch is set to <2>. ooAlthough movies can also be recorded with Movie digital IS when using EF-S lenses or movie cropping, the shooting area is further reduced.
Shooting HDR Movies You can shoot high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of high-contrast scenes. You can specify to shoot HDR movies from the Quick Control screen when using RF or EF lenses with [Movie rec. size] under [z1: Movie rec. quality] set to L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL), or when using EF-S lenses or movie cropping with this setting set to w6X (NTSC) or w5X (PAL). [Movie rec. size]. 1 Check zz Check that [Movie rec.
Shooting HDR Movies an HDR movie. 5 Shoot zz Shoot the movie in the same way as normal movie shooting. zz For details on file sizes and the recording time available, see the table on page 612. ooMovies are recorded in HD (Full HD is not available) when EF-S lenses or movie cropping is used. ooISO speed for HDR movies has a setting range of ISO 100–25600, whether set automatically or manually. ISO expansion is not available. ooFor details on shutter speeds, see page 215.
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing plants, celestial motion, etc.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies zzEnableH(3840x2160) The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00 fps (5) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format with ALL-I (W) compression. zzEnableL (1920x1080) The movie will be recorded in Full High-Definition (Full HD) quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00 fps (5) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format with ALL-I (W) compression.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies the number of shots. 6 Set zz Select [No. of shots]. zz Refer to the [k: Time required] and [3: Playback time] to set the number. zz Select the digit. zz Press <0> to display . zz Set the desired number, then press <0>. (Returns to .) zz Can be set in a range of [0002]– [3600]. zz Check that [3: Playback time] is not displayed in red. zz Select [OK] to register the setting. ooFor cards that can record time-lapse movies (card performance requirements), see page 611.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies the exposure’s setting 7 Select method. zz Select [Auto exposure]. zz Select an option, then press <0>. zzFixed 1st frame When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies the beeper. 9 Set zz Select [Beep as img taken]. zz If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not sound for shooting. 10 Check the settings. (1) (2) (1) Time required Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies the message. 12 Read zz Read the message and select [OK]. test shots. 13 Take zz As with still photo shooting, set the exposure and shooting functions, then press the shutter button halfway to focus. zz Press the shutter button completely to take test shots. The still photos will be recorded to the card. zz If there are no problems with the test shots, go to the next step. zz To take test shots again, repeat this step. ooTest shots are captured in JPEG 73 quality.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies the movie shooting button. 14 Press ggThe camera will be ready to start shooting a time-lapse movie. zz To return to step 13, press the movie shooting button again. the time-lapse movie. 15 Shoot zz Press the button and check (1) 230 (2) again the “Time required (1)” and “Interval (2)” displayed on the screen. zz Press the shutter button completely to start shooting the time-lapse movie. zz AF will not work during time-lapse movie shooting.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies ooUsing a tripod is recommended. ooTaking test shots as in step 13 and shooting test movies for time-lapse movies beforehand is recommended. ooRegardless of the [Movie rec. size] setting under [z1: Movie rec quality], 4K time-lapse movies are recorded in H6W (NTSC)/ H5W (PAL), and Full HD time-lapse movies are recorded in L 6 W (NTSC)/L 5 W (PAL). ooThe movie’s field of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD timelapse movie shooting is approx. 100%.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies ooDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. ooIf the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or if an HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select [Enable]. ooMovie Servo AF will not function.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies ooIf the shutter speed exceeds the shooting interval (such as for long exposures), or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may not be able to shoot at the set interval. Shooting may also be prevented by shooting intervals nearly the same as the shutter speed. ooIf the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies ooIf you start time-lapse movie shooting while the white temperature warning (p.253) is displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may decline. It is recommended that you start time-lapse movie shooting after the white disappears (camera’s internal temperature decreases). ooWith [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif information in some modes.
Shooting Time-lapse Movies You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.174) to start and stop the time-lapse movie shooting. zz With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 • First pair the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera (p.408). • Set [z2: Remote control] to [Enable]. • Take test shots, then when the camera is ready to shoot (as in step 14 on page 230), set the BR-E1’s release mode/movie shooting switch to (immediate release) or <2> (release after 2-sec. delay).
Shooting Movies Set to Canon LogN Canon Log gamma curve leverages image sensor characteristics to capture a wide dynamic range for movies that will be processed later in postproduction. With minimal loss of detail in shadows and highlights, movies retain more visual information across the dynamic range. To work with Canon Log movies in postproduction, you can apply look-up tables (LUTs). LUT data can be downloaded from the Canon website. the shooting mode to [M].
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log the options as desired. 5 Set zz Set [View Assist.], [Color Matrix] [Characteristics], and [HDMI color space]. For details, see pages 239–241. up shooting. 6 Set zz Set the ISO speed manually (p.242). 7 zz Set the shutter speed and aperture. Shoot the movie. zz Before recording movies to a card, see page 611. zz When recording movies to an external device via HDMI, connect the devices with an HDMI cable.
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log zzCanon Log zz On (8bit) Select when recording movies with Canon Log to the card. Also enables you to record to an external device via HDMI. Recording quality via HDMI switches automatically based on the [z1: Movie rec quality] setting. On (10bit) Select for 10-bit 4K (3840×2160) recording via HDMI to an external device that supports 10-bit recording in 4K. Movies cannot be recorded to the card. [z4: HDMI display] is automatically set to [A+a].
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log zzView Assist. When played on the camera, these movies may look darker and have lower contrast than movies shot with a Picture Style applied, due to Canon Log image characteristics, which are intended to ensure a wide dynamic range. For clearer display that makes it easier to check details, set [View Assist.] to [On]. ●●Setting this feature to [On] does not affect movies recorded to the card, which are recorded using Canon Log.
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log zzColor Matrix Using a color matrix, you can specify how colors are reproduced, to plan for postproduction processing. Cinema EOS Original Reproduces [Cinema EOS Original] colors as used on professional Cinema EOS cameras. Neutral Reproduces [Neutral] colors as used on professional Cinema EOS cameras. Similar to actual subject colors.
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log zzCharacteristics Adjust as needed. Select an item ([Sharpness: Strength], [Saturation], or [Hue]), adjust the effect level, then press <0>. Sharpness: Strength Saturation Reds Hue* Greens Blues 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis -4: Low -4: Toward magenta -4: Toward yellow -4: Toward cyan +4: High +4: Toward yellow +4: Toward cyan +4: Toward magenta * Reds, greens, and blues cannot be adjusted separately.
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log Shooting Settings zz Shooting with ISO Auto is not possible, and if set to ISO Auto when Canon Log is specified, the setting is changed to ISO 400. Set the ISO speed manually. zz Manually setting the ISO speed to 100–320 will make the dynamic range narrower. zz Canon Log offers a dynamic range of approx. 800% at ISO 400 or higher. zz With Canon Log, autofocusing may be more difficult for subjects under low light, or for low-contrast subjects.
Shooting Movies Set to Canon Log General Canon Log Shooting Precautions ooHDR movies are not available when Canon Log is set. ooSpecifying Canon Log will set [Peripheral illum corr] under [z2: Lens aberration correction] to [Disable]. ooCanon Log 2 and Canon Log 3 are not supported. Playing Movies Recorded with Canon Log View Assist is not used during movie playback.
Menu Function Settings This section describes menus used for shooting movies. [z1] zzMovie recording quality For details on movie recording quality, see page 192. zzMovie croppingM For details on movie cropping, see page 219. zzSound recording For details on sound recording, see page 202. zzTime code For details on time codes, see page 205. zzMovie digital IS For details on Movie digital IS, see page 220.
Menu Function Settings [z2] zzLens aberration correctionM Peripheral illumination, distortion, and chromatic aberration can be corrected as you shoot movies. For details on lens aberration correction, see page 110. zzTime-lapse movie For details on shooting time-lapse movies, see page 224. zzRemote control shooting When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.174). First, pair the BR-E1 with the camera (p.408).
Menu Function Settings [z3]M zzExposure compensationM Exposure compensation is available in a range of ±3 stops, in 1/3stop increments. For details on exposure compensation, see page 154. zzkISO speed settingsM ISO speed In [M] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also select ISO Auto. ISO speed range When recording HD/Full HD movies or Full HD time-lapse movies, you can set the ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum). By default, it is set to ISO 100–25600.
Menu Function Settings HISO Auto You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K movie shooting in [k], [t], or [v] mode or in [M] mode with ISO Auto. By default, it is set to [Max.:12800]. You can set the maximum limit within [Max.:6400] to [Max.:H2(102400)]. aISO Auto You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K/Full HD timelapse movie shooting in [k], [t], or [v] mode or in [M] mode with ISO Auto. By default, it is set to [Max.:12800]. You can set the maximum limit within [Max.:400] to [Max.
Menu Function Settings zzk Auto slow shutterM You can choose whether to shoot movies that are brighter and less noisy than when set to [Disable] by automatically slowing the shutter speed under low light. Available in [k] and [v] shooting modes. Applies to movies recorded with a frame rate of 7 or 8. Disable Enables you to shoot movies with smoother, more natural movement, less affected by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that under low light, movies may be darker than when set to [Enable].
Menu Function Settings zzMetering timerM For details on the metering timer, see page 119. zzk Av 1/8-stop incrementsM You can set aperture values on a finer scale when shooting movies with an RF lens. Select [Enable] to change the aperture increment from 1/3 stop (or 1/2 stop) to 1/8 stop in [v] or [M] mode. oo[kAv 1/8-stop incr.] is not available (not displayed) when EF or EF-S lenses are used. ooEven when set to [Enable], aperture cannot be set in 1/8-stop increments with EF or EF-S lenses.
Menu Function Settings [z4]M zzWhite balanceM For details on white balance, see page 97. zzCustom White BalanceM For details on custom white balance, see page 100. zzWhite balance correctionM For details on white balance correction, see page 102. zzPicture StyleM For details on Picture Styles, see page 88. zzCanon Log settingsM For details on Canon Log, see page 236. zzHigh ISO speed noise reductionM For details on High ISO speed noise reduction, see page 105.
Menu Function Settings zzHDMI display You can specify how movies are displayed as they are recorded via HDMI to an external device. Movie output itself is either 4K (3840×2160) or Full HD (1920×1080), depending on the [Movie rec. size] setting. The default setting for HDMI display is [A+a]. zzA+a ●●Enables movie display both on the camera screen and on the other device, via HDMI output. ●●Camera operations such as image playback or menu display are shown on the other device via HDMI, not on the camera.
Menu Function Settings For Longer HDMI Output To continue HDMI output for longer than 30 min., select [A+a], then set [Auto power off] under [52: Power saving] to [Disable] (p.377). HDMI output will continue after the screen turns off when the time set in [Display off] elapses. ooHDMI output without information prevents display of warnings about the card space, battery level, or high internal temperature (p.253) via HDMI.
General Movie Shooting Cautions Red Internal Temperature Warning Icon ooIf the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red icon will appear. ooThe red icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
General Movie Shooting Cautions Recording and Image Quality ooIf you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory). The slower (1) the card, the faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator (1) becomes full, movie shooting will stop automatically.
3 AF This chapter describes autofocus operation and introduces menu settings on the AF ([2]) tab. zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], or [BULB] mode. stands for autofocus. stands for manual focus.
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos) zzAF1 p.262 p.265 p.276 p.277 p.278 p.279 zzAF2 p.283 p.
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos) zzAF3 p.288 p.289 p.290 zzAF4 p.293 p.295 p.296 zzAF5 p.297 p.298 p.299 p.300 Features in [23], [24], and [25] menus are described in the camera’s Help system (p.405).
Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos) In [A] mode, the following screen is displayed. zzAF1 p.278 p.279 p.263 p.
Tab Menus: AF (Movies) zzAF1 p.265 p.279 p.286 zzAF2 p.283 p.
Tab Menus: AF (Movies) zzAF3 p.291 p.292 zzAF4 p.293 zzAF5 p.297 p.298 Features in [23], [24], and [25] menus are described in the camera’s Help system (p.405).
Tab Menus: AF (Movies) In [y] mode, the following screen is displayed. zzAF1 p.279 p.286 p.
Selecting the AF OperationN You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. 1 Select [21: AF operation]. 2 Select an item. If focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” (p.275).
Selecting the AF Operation One-Shot AF for Still Subjects (ONE SHOT) Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. zz When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. zz The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture. zz For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see p.144.
Selecting the AF Operation AF-Assist Beam Under low light, the AF-assist beam may be lit continuously when you press the shutter button halfway. This makes it easier to focus with AF. ooThe AF-assist beam does not fire when [21: AF operation] is set to [Servo AF]. ooThe AF-assist beam does not fire when Touch AF is used (when [z5: Touch Shutter] is set to [Disable]). ooA small series of flashes is fired by external flash units equipped with an IR AF-assist beam.
Selecting the AF Method You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. The camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in an AF point or Zone AF frame. In [A] mode, [u+Tracking] is set automatically. For instructions on selecting an AF method, see page 268. AF Method : Face+Tracking The camera detects and focuses on human faces. The AF point
appears over a detected face, which is then tracked. If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF.
Selecting the AF Method : Expand AF area (Z) Focusing uses one AF point and points above, below, and to the left and right . Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF. Although Servo AF requires you to focus on a subject initially with an AF point , focusing is easier with this AF method than with Zone AF. : Expand AF area: Around Focusing uses one AF point and surrounding points . Enables focusing over a wider area than Z AF point expansion.
Selecting the AF Method : Large Zone AF: Vertical Uses auto selection AF in a vertical Large Zone AF frame to cover a larger area than Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/AF point expansion and also effective for moving subjects. Generally focuses on the nearest subject. Note the camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in the Zone AF frame. AF points in focus are displayed with .
Selecting the AF Method Selecting the AF MethodM You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. If you prefer to focus manually, see page 281. 1 Select [21: AF method]. 2 Select an item. ooTo set the AF method, you can also access the AF method screen by pressing the button and then the button. ooThe descriptions on pages 269–272 assume that [21: AF operation] is set to [One-Shot AF] (p.263). With [Servo AF] (p.263) set, the AF point will turn blue when focus is achieved.
Selecting the AF Method zzu(face)+Tracking: c The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the AF point
also moves to track the face. the AF point. 1 Check gg
(an AF point) appears over any face detected. zz To choose a different face, first press the button, after which appears when multiple faces are detected. Use the keys to move over the face you want to focus on.
Selecting the AF Method Specifying a Subject for Focus On the screen, tap where you want to focus, whether on a subject or at a certain position. Once the AF point < > achieves focus, the AF point will also move to track the subject if you change the composition or if the subject moves. ooIf the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.281) so that the face can be detected, then perform AF.
Selecting the AF Method zz1-point AF / Expand AF area (Z) / Expand AF area: Around / Zone AF / Large Zone AF: Vertical / Large Zone AF: HorizontalM You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF screens are used as an example. 1 (1) Check the AF point. ggThe AF point (1) will appear. zz With Expand AF area (Z) or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF points are also displayed.
Selecting the AF Method on the subject. 3 Focus zz Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. ggWhen focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. ggIf focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange. 4 Take the picture.
Selecting the AF Method Magnified View You can check the focus by magnifying display by approx. 5x or 10x. Magnified view is not possible with [u+Tracking]. zz Magnification is centered on the AF point for [1-point AF], [Expand AF area (Z)], and [Expand AF area: Around] and is centered on the Zone AF frame for [Zone AF], [Large Zone AF: Vertical], and [Large Zone AF: Horizontal]. zz Autofocusing is performed with magnified display if you press the shutter button halfway when set to [1-point AF].
Selecting the AF Method Notes for AF AF Operation zz Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again. zz Image brightness may change during autofocusing. zz Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease. zz If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and focusing may be difficult.
Selecting the AF Method Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult zz Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped. zz Subjects in low light. zz Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction. zz Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.). zz Fine lines and subject outlines.
Setting the AF Point SizeN For pinpoint focusing, you can set [AF frame size] to [Small]. 1 Select [21: AF frame size]. 2 Select an item. Only available when [21: AF operation] is set to [One-Shot AF] and [21: AF method] is set to [1-point AF].
Focusing on People’s EyesN You can shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus. 1 Select [21: Eye Detection AF]. 2 Select [Enable]. 3 Aim the camera at the subject. ggAn AF point is displayed around their eye. zz You can also touch the screen to select an eye. 4 Take the picture. ooSubject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and shooting conditions. ooNo frame is displayed around eyes unless the camera detects the subject’s face or eyes.
Setting Continuous AF This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway. 1 Select [21: Continuous AF]. 2 Select [Enable]. ooEnabling this function reduces the number of shots available, because the lens is driven continuously and battery power is consumed. ooBefore setting the lens focus mode switch to during Continuous AF, set the camera’s power switch to <2>.
Setting Touch & Drag AF You can move the AF point or Zone AF frame by touching or dragging on the screen as you look through the viewfinder. Enabling Touch & Drag AF Select [21: Touch & drag AF 1 settings]. [Touch & drag AF]. 2 zSelect z Select [Enable]. Positioning Method You can set how positions are specified by touching or dragging. the positioning method. 1 Set zz Select an item. zz [Absolute] The AF point moves to the touched or dragged position on the screen.
Setting Touch & Drag AF Active Touch Area You can specify the area of the screen used for touch and drag operations. the active touch area. 1 Set zz Select an item. Touching the screen when [u+Tracking] is set displays a round orange frame < >. After you lift your finger at the position to move the AF point to, < > is displayed and that subject is tracked. To cancel subject selection, press the button.
MF: Focusing Manually If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and focus manually. the lens’s focus mode switch to 1 Set . zz Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly. the image. 2 Magnify zz Press the button, then the button. the magnified area. 3 Move zz Move the area horizontally by turning (1) (2) (3) (1) AE lock (2) Magnified area position (3) Magnification (Approx.) the <6> dial or vertically by turning the <5> dial.
MF: Focusing Manually magnification. 4 Adjust zz Each press of the button changes the magnification ratio, as follows. 1x → 5x → 10x manually. 5 Focus zz While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to focus. zz After focusing, press <0> to return to the normal view. 6 Take the picture. ooIn magnified view, the exposure is locked. ooEven with manual focusing, you can use the Touch Shutter to take a picture.
MF: Focusing Manually Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)M Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing easier. You can set the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of edge detection. 1 Select [22: MF peaking settings]. [Peaking]. 2 zSelect z Select [On]. 3 Set the level and color. zz Set it as necessary. ooPeaking display is not shown during magnified display. ooMF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO expansion is set.
MF: Focusing Manually Focus Guide Setting [Focus guide] to [On] provides a visual guide that shows which direction to adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed. The guide frame is displayed near any eyes that are detected for the main subject when [21: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] and [21: Eye Detection AF] is set to [Enable]. [22: Focus guide]. 1 Select zz In [A] mode, it is shown on the [21] tab. [On].
MF: Focusing Manually ooUnder difficult shooting conditions for AF (p.275), the guide frame may not be displayed correctly. ooNo AF points are displayed while the guide frame is displayed. ooNo adjustment information is detected for apertures darker than f/8 when MP-E 65mm f/2.8 1-5x Macro Photo is used or darker than f/11 for other lenses, as indicated by the Focus Guide appearance. ooThe guide frame is not displayed in these situations.
Setting Movie Servo AF With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie shooting. 1 Select [21: Movie Servo AF]. 2 Select [Enable]. zzWhen [Enable] is set: ●●The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are not pressing the shutter button halfway. ●●To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to record mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie Servo AF by touching [Z] in the lower left of the screen.
Setting Movie Servo AF Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable] ooShooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult • A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera. • A subject moving at a close distance to the camera. • When shooting with a higher f/number. • Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page 275. ooSince the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the possible movie shooting time (p.612) will be shortened.
Customizing AF FunctionsN [23] zzTracking sensitivity You can set the subject-tracking sensitivity, which affects responsiveness to interfering objects that move across AF points or subjects that stray from AF points during Servo AF. 0 Standard setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general. Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1 The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points.
Customizing AF Functions zz Acceleration/deceleration tracking Sets the Servo AF tracking sensitivity for subjects that change speed suddenly, as by suddenly moving or stopping. 0 Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed). -2 / -1 Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed). Effective when a setting of 0 makes focus unstable, due to slight subject movement or an obstruction in front of the subject.
Customizing AF Functions zzAF point auto switching This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF points as they track the subject moving dramatically up, down, left, or right. Takes effect when [21: AF method] is set to [Face+Tracking], [Expand AF area: Z], [Expand AF area: Around], [Zone AF], [Large Zone AF: Vertical], or [Large Zone AF: Horizontal]. 0 Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
Customizing AF Functions zzMovie Servo AF track sensitivity You can adjust the tracking sensitivity (to one of seven levels), which affects responsiveness if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo AF, as when interfering objects move across AF points or when you pan. This function is settable when [21: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [21: AF method] is set to [1-point AF].
Customizing AF Functions zzMovie Servo AF speed You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF speed and its operation conditions. This function is settable when [21: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [21: AF method] is set to [1-point AF]. Additionally, the function is enabled when using a lens supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting*.
Customizing AF Functions [24] zzLens electronic MF With the USM and STM lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing, you can set whether to use electronic manual focusing after autofocusing in One-Shot AF mode. 1 Select [24: Lens electronic MF]. 2 Select an item. [ ] Disable after One-Shot Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled. [ ] One-Shot→enabled You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep holding down the shutter button halfway.
Customizing AF Functions [ ] Disable in AF mode Manual focus adjustment is disabled when the lens’s focus mode switch is set to . With [One-Shot9enabled (magnify)], display may not be magnified even if you turn the lens focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway immediately after shooting. If so, you can magnify display by releasing the shutter button, waiting for display, then pressing the shutter button halfway as you turn the lens focusing ring.
Customizing AF Functions zzAF-assist beam firing Enables or disables the AF-assist beam of the camera or an external Speedlite for EOS cameras. 1 Select [24: AF-assist beam firing]. 2 Select an item. [ON] Enable Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed. [OFF] Disable Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire AF-assist beams from the camera and external flash units. [LED] LED AF assist beam only An LED AF-assist beam is fired by LED-equipped external flash units.
Customizing AF Functions zzOne-Shot AF release priority You can specify whether to prioritize focus or release timing for OneShot AF (except when shooting with Touch Shutter). [24: One-Shot AF release 1 Select prior.]. 2 Select an item. [ ] Focus priority The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing the image. [ ] Release priority Shutter release timing is prioritized over focusing.
Customizing AF Functions [25] zzLens drive when AF impossible If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera keep searching for the precise focus or have it stop searching. [25: Lens drive when AF 1 Select impossible]. 2 Select an item. [ON] Continue focus search If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search for the precise focus.
Customizing AF Functions zzLimit AF methods You can limit the AF methods available to those that you will use. For details on AF methods, see page 265. 1 Select [25: Limit AF methods]. limit the available AF methods, 2 To add a checkmark [X] to the ones to display. The [X] mark cannot be removed from [1-point AF]. An asterisk to the right of [25: Limit AF methods] indicates that the default setting has been modified.
Customizing AF Functions zzOrientation linked AF point You can assign AF points or Zone AF frames to different positions based on whether you are shooting vertically or horizontally. [25: Orientation linked AF 1 Select point]. 2 Select an item. [ ] Same for both vert/horiz AF points or Zone AF frames in the same position are used for both vertical and horizontal shooting. [ ] Separate AF pts: Pt only Separate AF point or Zone AF frame positions can be assigned for each camera orientation (1.
Customizing AF Functions zzInitial Servo AF pt for c You can set the initial AF point for Servo AF when the AF method is set to [Face+Tracking]. [25: Initial Servo AF pt for 1 Select c]. 2 Select an item. [ ] Initial AF pt set for c Servo AF starts from the manually set AF point when AF operation is set to [Servo AF] and the AF method is set to [u+Tracking].
4 Playback This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu settings on the Playback ([x]) tab. Images shot and saved with another device Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that have been edited or renamed on a computer.
Tab Menus: Playback zzPlayback 1 p.318 p.317 p.335 p.353 p.357 p.348 p.339 zzPlayback 2 p.346 p.345 p.321 p.331 p.313 p.311 zzPlayback 3 p.307 p.309 p.309 p.305 p.206 p.305 p.316 [31: RAW image processing] is not shown in [A] or [y] mode.
Index to Features: Playback and Related Operations Playback Image Transfer zz Single-image display B p.304 zz Shooting information display zz Image transfer to a computer/FTP server B p.348 B p.305 zz Print order (DPOF) B p.353 zz Grid display B p.305 zz Photobook Set-up B p.357 zz Touch playback B p.306 zz Playback information display B p.307 zz Index display B p.310 zz Image browsing (Jump display) B p.311 zz Setting image search conditions B p.313 zz Magnified view B p.
x Image Playback Single-Image Display back the image. 1 Play zz Press the button. an image. 2 Select zz To play back newer images, press the button, and to play back older images, press the button. zz Each time you press the button, the display will change. No information Basic information display Shooting information display the image playback. 3 Exit zz Press the button to exit the image playback.
Image Playback Shooting Information Display With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press the keys to change the information displayed. You can also customize the information displayed, in [x3: Playback information display] (p.307). Specifying Initial Image Display When Playback Begins You can specify which image is displayed first when you start image playback.
Image Playback Touch Playback The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones and similar devices. First, press the button to prepare for touch playback. Browsing images Jump display Index display Magnified view You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger.
Customizing Playback Information Display You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during image playback. [33: Playback information 1 Select display]. a checkmark [X] next to the 2 Add number of screens to display. zz Press the keys to select a number. zz Press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. zz Repeat these steps to add a checkmark [X] to the number of each screen to display, then select [OK].
Customizing Playback Information Display zz[Brightness] display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right) while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image. The more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the image.
Customizing Playback Information Display Highlight Alert When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed, clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again for a better result. AF Point Display When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that achieved focus will be displayed in red.
H Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or 100 images on one screen. the button. 1 Press zz During image playback, press the button. gg[6u] will be displayed on the lower right of the screen. to the index display. 2 Switch zz Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise. ggThe 4-image index display will appear. The selected image is highlighted with an orange frame.
e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images) In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through the images forward or backward according to the jump method set. 1 Select [x2: Image jump w/6]. the jump method. 2 Select [d] Display images one by one [e] Jump by 10 images [r] Jump images by the specified number [g] Display by date [h] Display by folder [i] Display movies only [j] Display stills only [P] Display protected images only [k] Display by image rating (p.
Jump Display (Jumping Through Images) by jumping. 3 Browse zz Press the button. zz In the single-image display, turn the <6> dial. ggYou can browse by the set method. (1) (2) (1) (2) Jump method Playback position ooTo search images by shooting date, select [g: Date]. ooTo search images by folder, select [h: Folder]. ooIf the card contains both movies and still photos, select [i: Movies] or [j: Stills] to display one or the other.
t Filtering Images for Playback You can filter image display according to your search conditions. After setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only the found images. You can also protect, rate, erase, play a slide show, and apply other operations to filtered images. This feature enables you to quickly do a specific task to the found images in one batch. [32: Set image search 1 Select conditions]. the search conditions. 2 Set zz Press the keys to select an item.
Filtering Images for Playback the search conditions. 3 Apply zz Press <0> and read the message displayed. zz Select [OK]. ggThe search condition is specified. the found images. 4 Display zz Press the <3> button. (2) ggOnly the images that match the set conditions (filtered) will be played back. ggWhen the images are filtered for display, the screen will have an outer yellow frame (2). Clearing the Search Conditions Access the screen in step 2, then press the button to remove all the checkmarks [X].
u Magnifying Images You can magnify your captured images. the image. 1 Magnify zz During image playback, press the (1) button. ggThe magnified view will appear. The magnified area position (1) and [6u] will be displayed on the lower right of the screen. zz To magnify images, turn the <6> dial clockwise. zz To reduce magnification, turn the <6> dial counterclockwise. For index display (p.310), keep turning the dial. the image.
Magnifying Images Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position If you select [33: Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the initial magnification ratio and position for the magnified view. zz1x (no magnification) The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the single-image display. zz2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center) The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected magnification.
b Rotating Images You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation. 1 Select [31: Rotate image]. an image. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select the image to be rotated. the image. 3 Rotate zz Each time you press <0>, the image will rotate clockwise as follows: 90° → 270° → 0°. zz To rotate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3. ooIf you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.372) before taking vertical shots, you need not rotate the image with this function.
K Protecting Images You can protect important images from being accidentally erased. Protecting a Single Image 1 Select [31: Protect images]. 2 Select [Select images]. an image. 3 Select zz Press the keys to select the image to be protected. (1) the image. 4 Protect zz Press <0> to protect the selected image. The icon (1) will appear at the top of the screen. zz To cancel the image protection, press <0> again. The icon will disappear. zz To protect another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Protecting Images Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at once. [Select range]. 1 Select zz Select [Select range] in [31: Protect images]. the range of images. 2 Specify zz Select the first image (start point), then press <0>. zz Next, select the last image (end point), then press <0>.
Protecting Images Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [31: Protect images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected. To cancel the selection, select [Unprotect all images in folder] or [Unprotect all images on card]. If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions] (p.
p Setting Ratings You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 (l/m/n/o/p). This function is called rating. Rating a Single Image 1 Select [32: Rating]. 2 Select [Select images]. the image to be rated. 3 Select zz Press the keys to select the image to be rated. the image. 4 Rate zz Press <0>, and a blue highlight frame will appear as shown in the screen shown on the left. zz Press the keys to select a rating mark, then press <0>.
Setting Ratings Rating by Specifying the Range While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once. [Select range]. 1 Select zz Select [Select range] in [32: Rating]. the range. 2 Specify zz Select the first image (start point), then press <0>. zz Next, select the last image (end point), then press <0>. zz A checkmark [X] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images.
Setting Ratings Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once. Under [32: Rating], when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be rated. Turn the <6> dial to select a rating, then select [OK]. When you are not rating images or cancelling the rating, select [OFF]. If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions] (p.
k Enjoying Movies You can play back and enjoy the captured movies mainly in the following three ways. Playback on a Television (p.333) By connecting the camera to a television with an HDMI cable, you can play back the captured still photos and movies on the television. Using the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended. Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a interface cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved. Playback on the Camera Screen (p.
k Playing Back Movies back the image. 1 Play zz Press the button. a movie. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select the movie to be played back. zz In the single-image display, the icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie. zz In the index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie. As movies cannot be played back from the index display, press <0> to switch to the singleimage display. the single-image display, press 3 In<0 >. <0> to play back the movie.
Playing Back Movies Movie Playback Panel Item 7 Play 8 Slow motion 5 First frame 3 Previous frame 6 Next frame 4 Last frame X Edit I Frame Grab mm’ ss” Volume Playback Operations Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop. Adjusts the slow motion speed by turning the < 5> dial. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the screen. Displays the movie’s first frame. Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>. Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.
XEditing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec. increments. movie playback. 1 Pause ggThe movie playback panel will appear. the movie playback panel, 2 On select [X]. the part to be edited out. 3 Specify zz Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or [V] (Cut end), then press <0>. zz Press the keys to see the previous or next frames. Keep holding down the key to fast forward or fast rewind the frames.
Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes the edited movie. 5 Save zz Select [W], then press <0>. zz The save screen will appear. zz To save it as a new movie, select [New file]. To save it and overwrite the original movie file, select [Overwrite], then press <0>. zz On the confirmation dialog, select [OK] to save the edited movie and return to the movie playback screen. ooBecause editing is performed in approx. 1-sec.
I Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies From 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies, you can select individual frames to save as approx. 8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still images. This function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”. back the image. 1 Play zz Press the <3> button. a 4K movie. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select a 4K movie or 4K time-lapse movie. zz On the shooting information screen, 4K movies and 4K time-lapse movies are indicated by an [H] icon.
Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies the frame. 7 Save zz Select [OK] to save the current frame as a JPEG still image. the image to display. 8 Select zz Check the destination folder and image file number. zz Select [View original movie] or [View extracted still image]. ggThe selected image will be displayed. Frame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies, Full HD time-lapse movies, or with 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies shot with a different camera.
Slide Show (Auto Playback) You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show. the images to be played 1 Specify back. zz To play back all the images on the card, go to step 2. zz If you want to specify the images to be played back in the slide show, filter the images with [32: Set image search conditions] (p.313). 2 Select [32: Slide show]. the playback as desired. 3 Set zz Select [Set up], then press <0>.
Slide Show (Auto Playback) the slide show. 4 Start zz Select [Start], then press <0>. ggAfter [Loading image...] is displayed, the slide show will start. the slide show. 5 Exit zz To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the button. ooTo pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide show.
Viewing Images on a Television By connecting the camera to a television with an HDMI cable, you can play back the captured still photos and movies on the television. Using the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended. If the image does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your television). the HDMI cable to the 1 Connect camera.
Viewing Images on a Television ooAdjust movie sound volume with the television. The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera. ooBefore connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television, turn off the camera and television. ooDepending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut off. ooDo not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction. ooCertain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.
L Erasing Images You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.318) will not be erased. Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a Single Image the image to be erased. 1 Select zz Press the button. zz Press the keys to select the image to be erased. 2 Press the button.
Erasing Images Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those images at once. 1 Select [31: Erase images]. 2 Select [Select and erase images]. an image. 3 Select zz Press the keys to select the image to be erased, then press <0>. ggA checkmark [X] will be displayed on the upper left of the screen. zz To select another image to be erased, repeat step 3. the images. 4 Erase zz Press the button, then press [OK].
Erasing Images Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at once. [Select range]. 1 Select zz Select [Select range] in [31: Erase images]. the range of images. 2 Specify zz Select the first image (start point), then press <0>. zz Next, select the last image (end point), then press <0>.
Erasing Images Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When [31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased. If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions] (p.313), the display will change to [All found images]. If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be erased.
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN You can process 1 or F images with the camera and save them as JPEG images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it. You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images. [31: RAW image 1 Select processing]. an item, then select images. 2 Select zz You can select multiple images to process at once.
Processing RAW Images with the Camera the desired processing 3 Set conditions. [Use shot settings] zz Images are processed using image settings at the time of capture. [Customize RAW processing] zz Press the keys to select an item. zz Turn the <6> or <5> dial to switch the setting. zz Press <0> to access the function setting screen. zz To return to the image settings at the time of shooting, press the button.
Processing RAW Images with the Camera the image to display. 5 Select zz Select [Original image] or [Processed img.]. ggThe selected image will be displayed. Magnified View You can magnify images displayed for [Customize RAW processing] by pressing the button. Magnification varies depending on the [Image quality] setting. Using cross keys, you can scroll the magnified image vertically and horizontally. To cancel the magnified view, press the button again.
Processing RAW Images with the Camera RAW Image Processing Options zz[ ] Brightness adjustment zz[ ] White balance (p.97) zz[ ] Picture Style (p.88) You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments. You can select the white balance. If you select [Q], you can select [Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [P], you can set the color temperature. You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other parameters.
Processing RAW Images with the Camera zz[ ] Color space (p.117) zz[ ] Lens aberration correction You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set. [ ] Peripheral illumination correction (p.111) A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed.
Processing RAW Images with the Camera [ ] Chromatic aberration correction (p.113) Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.341). [ ] Diffraction correction (p.113) The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed.
S Resizing JPEG Images You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, and a images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized. 1 Select [32: Resize]. an image. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select the image you want to resize. the desired image size. 3 Select zz Press <0> to display the image (1) sizes. zz Select the desired image size (1), then press <0>.
N Cropping JPEG Images You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image. Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG images. Images shot in RAW cannot be cropped. 1 Select [x2: Cropping]. an image. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select the image you want to crop. the cropping frame. 3 Set zz Press <0> to display the cropping frame. zz The image area within the cropping frame will be cropped. zzChanging the Cropping Frame Size Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size.
Cropping JPEG Images zzMoving the Cropping Frame Press the cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area. zzCorrecting the Tilt You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the <5> dial to select , then press <0>. While checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <5> dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right wedge (in 0.5° increments) on the upper left of the screen to correct the tilt.
d Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server You can connect the camera to a computer and use the camera to transfer images from the card to the computer. You can also connect the camera to a wireless file transmitter (sold separately) and transfer images to an FTP server. This function is called direct image transfer. Direct image transfer is performed from the camera, as you look at the camera screen.
Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server the power switch to <1>. 3 Set zz When a message to select a program is displayed on the computer, select [EOS Utility]. ggThe EOS Utility screen is displayed on the computer. After the EOS Utility screen appears, do not operate EOS Utility. [Direct transfer] in step 6 on page 351 is not displayed unless the main EOS Utility screen is displayed, which will prevent image transfer to the computer.
Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server Selecting Images to Transfer zzSelecting Images 1 Select [x1: Image transfer]. 2 Select [Image sel./transfer]. a transfer method. 3 Select zz Select [Direct transfer] for image transfer to a computer. 4 Select [Sel.Image]. the images to transfer. 5 Select zz Press the keys to select images to transfer, then press <0>. zz Press the keys to add a [X] in the upper left of the screen, then press <0>.
Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server the image. 6 Transfer zz Confirm that the main EOS Utility screen is displayed on the computer. zz Select [Direct transfer], then press <0>. zz Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog to transfer the images to the computer. zz You can also transfer images selected with [Multiple] this way. ooWhen [Sel.Image] is selected, you can check image transfer status in the upper left of the screen: No mark: Not selected. X: Selected for transfer. l: Transfer failed.
Transferring Images to a Computer/FTP Server In a Folder Selecting [Folder images not transfer’d] selects all unsent images in the folder. Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] selects all images in the folder for which transfer failed. Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] clears the transfer history of images in the folder. After clearing the transfer history, you can select [Folder images not transfer’d] and transfer all images in the folder again.
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher. You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the images specified for printing.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) the setting. 4 Exit zz Press the button. zz Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to specify the images to be printed. ooRAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. ooIf you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting (p.353), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In such a case, resize the image (p.345), then print the index print. ooEven if [Date] and [File No.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Specifying Images for Printing zzSelecting Images Select and specify the images one by one. Press the button to save the print order to the card. (1) (2) Standard / Both Press <0> to print a copy of the displayed image. By pressing the keys, you can set the number of copies to be printed up to 99. (1) (2) (3) (4) Quantity Total images selected Index Press <0> to add a checkmark to the box [X]. The image will be included in the index print.
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) All Images in a Folder Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the images in the folder will be canceled. All Images on a Card If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the card will be specified for printing.
p Specifying Images for a Photobook You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to import images to a computer, the specified images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online. Specifying One Image at a Time 1 Select [31: Photobook Set-up]. 2 Select [Select images]. the image to be specified. 3 Select zz Press the keys to select the image to be specified, then press <0>.
Specifying Images for a Photobook Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the range (start point to end point) of images to be specified for a photobook at once. [Multiple]. 1 Select zz Under [31: Photobook Set-up], select [Multiple]. 2 Select [Select range]. the range of images. 3 Specify zz Select the first image (start point), then press <0>. zz Next, select the last image (end point), then press <0>.
Specifying Images for a Photobook Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a photobook. Under [x1: Photobook Set-up], you can set [Multiple] to [All images in folder] or [All images on card] to specify all the images in the folder or on the card for a photobook. To cancel the selection, select [Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on card]. If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions] (p.
360
5 Set-up This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up ([5]) tab. zz A M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available only in [t], [d], [s], [f], [a], or [BULB] mode.
Tab Menus: Set-up zzSet-up 1 p.365 p.367 p.370 p.372 p.373 zzSet-up 2 p.376 p.377 p.378 p.379 p.380 p.383 zzSet-up 3 p.384 p.385 p.386 p.387 p.391 p.395 p.
Tab Menus: Set-up zzSet-up 4 p.397 p.402 p.402 p.403 p.406 zzSet-up 5 p.407 p.411 zzSet-up 6 p.416 p.417 p.419 p.420 p.422 p.422 p.
Tab Menus: Set-up When you are shooting movies, the following screen is displayed for [54]. p.397 p.402 p.403 p.404 p.406 In [A] and [y] modes, the following screen is displayed for [56]. p.416 p.
Creating and Selecting a Folder You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved. Creating a Folder 1 Select [51: Select folder]. 2 Select [Create folder]. 3 Select [OK].
Creating and Selecting a Folder Selecting a Folder (1) (3) (2) (4) zz Select a folder on the folder selection screen. zz Captured images are stored in your selected folder. (1) (2) (3) (4) Number of images in folder Lowest file number Folder name Highest file number Folders A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001–9999). When a folder becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.
File Numbering Methods The captured images saved in a folder are assigned a file number from 0001 to 9999. (Example) BE3B0001.JPG You can change how the image files are File number numbered. 1 Select [51: File numbering]. the item. 2 Set zz Select [Numbering]. zz Select [Continuous] or [Auto reset]. zz If you want to reset the file numbering, select [Manual reset] (p.369). zz Select [OK] to create a new folder, and the file number will start with 0001.
File Numbering Methods Continuous When you wish to continue the file numbering sequence even after the card is replaced or a new folder is created. Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
File Numbering Methods Auto Reset When you wish to restart the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created. When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to organize images by cards or folders.
Renaming Files File names consist of four alphanumeric characters followed by a four-digit image (Example) BE3B0001.JPG number (p.367) and the file extension. You can change the first four characters. Registering/Changing File Names 1 Select [51: File name]. [Change User setting*]. 2 Select zz [User setting1] You can register four characters of your choice. zz [User setting2] You can register three characters of your choice. The fourth character, for the image quality (p.371), is assigned automatically.
Renaming Files zz Use the cross keys or <5> dial to select a character, then press <0> to enter it. ], you can change zz By selecting [ the input mode. the setting. 4 Exit zz Press the button, then press 5 [OK]. Select a registered file name. zz Select [File name]. zz Select a registered file name. An underscore cannot be used as the first character.
Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images You can change the auto rotation setting that straightens images shot in vertical orientation when they are displayed. 1 Select [51: Auto rotate]. 2 Select an item. zzOnzD Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and computers. zzOnD Automatically rotates images only for display on computers. zzOff Images captured with auto rotation set to [Off] will not rotate during playback even if you later set auto rotation to [On].
Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera. When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a computer, etc. before formatting the card. 1 Select [51: Format card]. the card. 2 Format zz Select [OK].
Formatting the Card Format the card in the following cases: zz The card is new. zz The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer. zz The card is full of images or data. zz A card-related error is displayed (p.607). Low-Level Formatting zz Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
Formatting the Card ooIt may not be possible to use SDXC cards formatted with this camera in other cameras. Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by some computer operating systems or card readers. ooFormatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data. Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards.
Setting Eco Mode Enables you to conserve battery power in shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery consumption. 1 Select [52: Eco mode]. [On]. 2 Select zz The screen darkens when the camera is not used for approximately two seconds. Approx. ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off. zz To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off, press the shutter button halfway.
Setting Power-Saving Features You can adjust the timing of when the screen, camera, and viewfinder turn off automatically (Display off, Auto power off, and Viewfinder off). 1 Select [52: Power saving]. an item. 2 Select zz Even when [Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn off after the time set in [Display off]. [Display off] and [Auto power off] settings do not apply when Eco mode is set to [On].
Adjusting the Screen Brightness Screen and viewfinder brightness can be adjusted separately. 1 Select [52: Disp. brightness]. the adjustment. 2 Make zz Referring to the gray chart, press the keys to adjust the brightness, then press <0>. zz When adjusting viewfinder brightness, look through the viewfinder as you set it. To check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram (p.307) is recommended.
Adjusting the Screen Color Tone Screen and viewfinder color tone can be adjusted separately. 1 Select [52: Disp. color tone]. the adjustment. 2 Make zz Press the keys or turn the <5> dial to select an item, then press <0>. zz When adjusting viewfinder color tone, look through the viewfinder as you set it.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone first. By setting the time zone first, you can simply adjust this setting as needed in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it. Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date and time information, be sure to set your date/time. 1 Select [52: Date/Time/Zone]. the time zone.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone zz Press the keys to select a [Time difference] item (+/-/hour/ minute), then press <0>. zz Press the keys to set it, then press <0>. zz After entering the time zone or time difference, press the keys to select [OK], then press <0>. the date and time. 3 Set zz Press the keys to select an item, then press <0>. zz Press the keys to set it, then press <0>. the daylight saving time. 4 Set zz Set it as necessary.
Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone ooThe date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this happens, set them once again. ooAfter changing [Zone/Time difference], check that the correct date/time are set. Auto power off time may be extended while the [52: Date/Time/Zone] screen is displayed.
Setting the Interface Language 1 Select [52: LanguageK]. 2 Set the desired language.
Setting the Video System Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting determines the frame rates available when you shoot movies. 1 Select [53: Video system]. an item. 2 Select zz NTSC For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). zz PAL For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
Setting the Touch Control Response 1 Select [53: Touch control]. an item. 2 Select zz [Standard] is the normal setting. zz [Sensitive] provides a more reactive touch-screen panel response than [Standard]. zz To disable touch operations, select [Disable]. Cautions for Touch Control Operations ooSince the screen is not pressure sensitive, do not use any sharp objects, such as your fingernail or a ballpoint pen, for touch operations. ooDo not use wet fingers for touch operations.
Disabling Beeps for Camera Operations You can disable beeping when subjects are in focus or for other operations. 1 Select [53: Beep]. an item. 2 Select zz Touch The beeper will be silent only for touch operations. zz Disable Disables beeping when subjects are in focus, when you shoot with the self-timer, and when you use touch operations.
Checking the Battery Information You can check the conditions of the battery you are using. By registering multiple batteries to the camera, you can check their approximate remaining capacity and usage history. Select [53: Battery info.]. (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (4) (3) (5) (4) (5) Battery position Battery model or household power source being used. The battery level indicator (p.49) is displayed together with the remaining battery level shown in 1% increments.
Checking the Battery Information Registering Batteries to the Camera You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for each battery. the button. 1 Press zz With the battery info. screen displayed, press the button. ggIf the battery is not registered, it will be grayed out. 2 Select [Register]. [OK]. 3 Select ggThe battery is now displayed in white.
Checking the Battery Information Labeling Batteries with Serial Numbers It is convenient to label registered LP-E6N/LP-E6 battery packs with their serial numbers, using commercially available labels. a label approx. 25×15 mm, write 1 On the serial number (1). (1) 7c40 0300 the label. 2 Apply zz Set the power switch to <2>. zz Remove the battery from the camera. zz Apply the label as shown in the illustration (on the side with no electrical contacts).
Checking the Battery Information Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery You can check the remaining capacity of batteries not currently in use, as well as their last date of use. (1) (3) (2) Look for the serial number. zz Refer to the battery’s serial number label and look for the battery’s serial number (1) on the battery history screen. ggYou can check the respective battery’s approximate remaining capacity (2) and the date when it was last used (3).
f Sensor Cleaning Self-cleaning of the front of the sensor is performed whenever you set the power switch to <2>. You can also activate sensor cleaning manually. Activating Immediate Cleaning 1 Select [53: Sensor cleaning]. [Clean nowf]. 2 Select zz Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog.
Sensor Cleaning Setting Auto Cleaning 1 Select [Auto cleaningf]. an item. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select an item, then press <0>. ooFor best results, clean with the camera in a stable position on a desk or other flat surface. ooEven if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Note that [Clean nowf] may not be available immediately after cleaning.
Sensor Cleaning Manual Sensor CleaningM Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed manually with a commercially available blower or similar tool. The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended. 1 Select [Clean manually]. 2 Select [OK]. the lens and clean the 3 Remove sensor. the cleaning. 4 End zz Set the power switch to <2>.
Sensor Cleaning ooWhile cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the power is cut off, the shutter will close. These may result in damaging the image sensor and shutter curtains. • Setting the power switch to <2>. • Removing or inserting the battery. ooThe surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with care. ooUse a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the sensor. ooDo not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount.
Setting the HDMI Output Resolution Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a television or external recording device with an HDMI cable. 1 Select [53: HDMI resolution]. an item. 2 Select zz Auto The images will automatically be displayed at the optimum resolution matching the connected television. zz 1080p Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you prefer to avoid display or delay issues when the camera switches resolution.
RAW Playback on an HDR TV You can view RAW images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR TV. 1 Select [53: HDMI HDR output]. 2 Select [On]. ooImage operations such as RAW processing are not available during HDR display. ooJPEG images are used for HDR display in the case of L (ISO 50-equivalent) images or multiple-exposure RAW images. ooMake sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch inputs on the TV, refer to the TV manual.
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the camera or in viewfinder when you shoot. Select [54: Shooting info. disp.]. Customizing Information on the Screen 1 Select [Screen info. settings]. screens. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select screens of information to show on the camera. zz For screens you prefer not to display, press <0> to clear the checkmark [X]. zz To edit the screen, press the button. the screen.
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting Customizing Information in the Viewfinder 1 Select [VF info/toggle settings]. screens. 2 Select zz Press the keys to select screens of information to show in the viewfinder. zz For screens you prefer not to display, press <0> to clear the checkmark [X]. zz To edit the screen, press the button. the screen. 3 Edit zz Press the keys to select items to show in the viewfinder.
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting Vertical Viewfinder Display You can select how viewfinder information is displayed when you are shooting still photos vertically. 1 Select [VF vertical display]. an item. 2 Select zz On Information is automatically rotated, making it easier to read. zz Off Information is not automatically rotated. Grid Display A grid can be displayed on the screen and viewfinder. 1 Select [Grid display]. 2 Select an item.
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting Setting the Histogram You can select the content and display size of the histogram. 1 Select [Histogram disp]. an item. 2 Select zz Select the content ([Brightness] or [RGB]) and display size ([Large] or [Small]). zz Press the button to confirm the setting. Setting Focus Distance Display You can display focus distance when using RF lenses. In focus distance display, you can select the timing and unit of measurement. 1 Select [Focus distance disp].
Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting Clearing Settings You can restore [Shooting info. disp.] defaults. 1 Select [Reset]. 2 Select [OK].
Setting a Priority for Shooting Display Performance You can select the performance parameter to prioritize in shooting screen display for still photos. 1 Select [54: Disp. performance]. 2 Select an item. Setting the Viewfinder Display Format You can select the viewfinder display format. 1 Select [54: VF display format]. an item. 2 Select zz Press the keys for selection. zz Press <0> to set it.
Setting the Display Mode You can select the display mode for shooting screens. 1 Select [54: Display settings]. an item. 2 Select zz Auto Normally use the screen for display, but switch to the viewfinder when you look through it. zz Manual You can restrict display to the screen or viewfinder. screen or viewfinder display. 3 Select zz Press <0> to confirm the setting.
Customizing Shutter Button Functionality You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely during movie shooting. 1 Select [54: V btn function]. an item. 2 Select zz Half-press Specify whether pressing the shutter button halfway starts metering, metering and Movie Servo AF, or metering and One-Shot AF. zz Fully-press Specify whether pressing the shutter button completely is disregarded or starts/stops movie shooting.
1 Help When [zHelp] is displayed below a menu, you can display a description about the feature by pressing the button. Press it again to exit Help display. To scroll the screen when a scrollbar (1) appears on the right, press the keys or turn the <5> dial.
Help Help Display Text Size You can change the text size for the Help display. 1 Select [54: Help text size]. 2 Select an item.
Setting Wireless Features You can connect the camera to a smartphone or computer wirelessly and send your shots or control the camera remotely. [55: Wireless 1 Select communication settings]. the item. 2 Set zz For details, see Chapter 6, “Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions”.
Setting Wireless Features Shooting with a Remote Control By pairing the camera via Bluetooth with Wireless Remote Control BRE1 (sold separately, supporting Bluetooth low energy technology), you can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 m/16.4 ft. from the camera. Pairing To use BR-E1, you must first pair (connect and register) the camera and remote control. [55: Wireless 1 Select communication settings]. 2 Select [Bluetooth function]. 3 Select [Bluetooth function]. [Remote].
Setting Wireless Features [Pairing]. 5 Select zz Select [Pairing]. zz Press and hold the button and button on the BR-E1 simultaneously for 3 sec. or more. ggPairing now begins. When pairing is complete, BR-E1 is registered on the camera. When shooting still photos When shooting movies up the camera for remote 6 Set shooting. zz Select [Q] or [k] as the drive mode (p.144). zz In [z2: Remote control], select [Enable].
Setting Wireless Features Canceling the Pairing Before pairing with a different BR-E1, clear the information about the connected remote control. [55: Wireless 1 Select communication settings]. 2 Select [Bluetooth function]. [Check/clear connection 3 Select info]. 4 Press the button. the connection information. 5 Clear zz Select [OK].
Geotagging Images You can geotag images with GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) or a Bluetooth enabled smartphone. Using GP-E2 GP-E2 to the camera. 1 Attach zz Attach GP-E2 to the camera’s hot shoe and turn it on. For details, refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual. 2 Select [55: GPS device settings]. 3 Select [GPS receiver]. the picture. 4 Take zz For details on [Set up], refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
Geotagging Images Using a Smartphone The dedicated application Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on the smartphone. For details on installing Camera Connect, see page 427. Specifying the smartphone as the GPS device the smartphone, activate 1 On location services. a Bluetooth connection. 2 Establish zz Connect the camera to a smartphone via Bluetooth. For details, see page 429. 3 Select [55: GPS device settings].
Geotagging Images [Smartphone]. 4 Select zz Select [Smartphone] in [Select GPS device]. ggLocation information can now be acquired from the smartphone. zz To check acquired geotag information (latitude, longitude, elevation, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)), select [GPS information display] on the [GPS device settings] screen. the picture. 5 Take zz Images are geotagged with the information from the smartphone.
Geotagging Images GPS connection display You can check the status of smartphone location information acquisition on the screens for still photo or movie shooting (p.619 and p.621, respectively). ●●Gray: Location services are off ●●Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired ●●On: Location information acquired For details on how GPS connection status is indicated when the GP-E2 is used, refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.
Geotagging Images ooThe smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with the camera via Bluetooth. ooDirection information is not acquired. ooAcquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling conditions or smartphone status. ooIt may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone after you turn the camera on. ooLocation information is no longer acquired after any of the following operations.
R Setting the Multi-Function Lock Specify camera controls to lock when the Multi-function lock is enabled. This can help prevent accidentally changing settings. 1 Select [56: Multi function lock]. camera controls to lock. 2 Select zz Press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. zz Select [OK]. ggPressing the button locks the selected [X] camera controls. ooIn [A] mode, only [Touch control] can be set.
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN You can register current camera settings, such as shooting, menu, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes assigned to to modes. You can register different functions to use when shooting still photos or movies. [56: Custom shooting mode 1 Select (C1-C3)]. 2 Select [Register settings]. the desired items. 3 Register zz Select the Custom shooting mode to register, then select [OK] on the registration screen.
Registering Custom Shooting Modes My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes. You can also change shooting and menu settings in Custom shooting modes.
Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN The camera’s settings for shooting functions and menu functions can be reverted to their defaults. [56: Clear all camera 1 Select settings]. 2 Select [OK]. For how to clear all the Custom Function settings, see page 554.
Setting Copyright InformationN When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as Exif information. 1 Select [56: Copyright information]. 2 Select an item. text. 3 Enter zz Use the cross keys or <5> dial to select a character, then press <0> to enter it. zz By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode. zz You can enter up to 63 characters. zz Select [ ] or press the button to delete any unneeded characters. the setting. 4 Exit zz Press the button, then press [OK].
Setting Copyright Information Checking the Copyright Information When you select [Display copyright info.] in step 2, you can check the [Author] and [Copyright] information that you entered. Deleting the Copyright Information When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information. If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
Checking Other Information zzDownloading instruction manuals To download instruction manuals, select [56: Manual/software URL] and scan the displayed QR code with a smartphone. Note that scanning QR codes requires an app. zzDisplaying certification logosM Select [56: Certification Logo Display] to display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s package.
6 Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions This chapter describes how to send images via Wi-Fi® from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and how to use Web services.
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions (CANON iMAGE GATEWAY) (4) Send images to a Web service (3) Print images using a Wi-Fi printer (1) Communicate with a smartphone (2) Use with EOS software or other dedicated software Important Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage from erroneous wireless communication settings when using the camera. In addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other loss or damage caused by use of the camera.
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions (1) q Communicate with a smartphone (p.427) Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over a Wi-Fi connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on smartphones or tablets (collectively referred to as “smartphones” in this manual). (2) D Use with EOS software or other dedicated software (p.461) Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the camera remotely using EOS Utility (EOS software).
What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions Bluetooth® Features By pairing the camera with a smartphone compatible with Bluetooth low energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”), you can: ●●Establish a Wi-Fi connection from either the camera or smartphone, by itself (p.448, 511) ●●Establish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is off (p.437) ●●Geotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone (p.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi This section describes how to directly connect the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi. zz Connecting to a smartphone via Wi-Fi enables you to perform the following: ●●View images stored in the camera on a smartphone or save viewed images to a smartphone. ●●Operate the camera to take a picture or change camera settings using a smartphone. ●●Send images to a smartphone from the camera.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi zz Use the latest version of the smartphone OS. zz Camera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone. Android iOS ooFor the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the download site of Camera Connect.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the Camera (1) [55: Wireless 1 Select communication settings]. 2 Select [Wi-Fi settings]. 3 Select [Wi-Fi]. [Enable]. 4 Select zz After the [Wi-Fi settings] screen appears, press the button to return to the [Wireless communication settings] screen.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi 5 Select [Bluetooth function]. 6 Select [Bluetooth function]. 7 Select [Smartphone]. 8 Register [Nickname]. zz When using the displayed nickname, press the button. zz You can change the nickname as needed (p.514).
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi 9 Select [OK]. 10 Select [Pairing]. an item. 11 Select zz If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. zz If Camera Connect is not installed, select [Android] or [iOS], scan the displayed QR code with the smartphone to access Google Play or App Store and install Camera Connect. ggPairing now begins.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the Smartphone (1) 12 Enable the Bluetooth function. 13 Start Camera Connect. the camera to pair with. 14 Select ggIf you are using an Android smartphone, go to step 16. 15 Tap on [Pair] (iOS only).
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the Camera (2) 16 Select [OK]. <0>. 17 Press zz Pairing is now complete, and the camera is connected to the smartphone via Bluetooth. ggA Bluetooth icon appears on the main Camera Connect screen. ooPairing or Bluetooth connection is not possible if the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an interface cable. ooThe camera cannot be connected to two or more devices at the same time via Bluetooth.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the Smartphone (2) a Camera Connect function. 18 Select zz In iOS, select [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera connection. zz For the Camera Connect functions, see page 444. ggWhen a Wi-Fi connection is established, the screen for the selected function will appear. gg[qWi-Fi on] is displayed on the camera. ggThe Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on the main Camera Connect screen.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi zz For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the WiFi Connection” (p.457). zz Terminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth connection. zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (p.509). [qWi-Fi on] Screen Disconnect,exit zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection. Confirm set. zz You can check the settings. Error details zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the error.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi [Bluetooth function] Screen On the [Bluetooth function] screen, you can change or check the Bluetooth function settings. Bluetooth function zz Select the device to pair with the camera. zz If you will not use the Bluetooth function, select [Disable]. Pairing zz Pair the camera with the device selected in [Bluetooth function]. Check/clear connection info zz You can check the name and communication status of the paired device.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Stay conn. if off zz Selecting [Enable] lets you view images on the camera and control it in other ways by connecting via Wi-Fi even if the camera is off. For details, see “Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off”. Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off Once the devices are paired, you can use a smartphone to connect via Wi-Fi and transfer images from the camera even when it is off. Setting [Stay conn. if off] [Bluetooth function].
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is Off Camera Connect. 1 Start zz Start Camera Connect on a smartphone paired with the camera via Bluetooth. [Images on camera]. 2 Select zz In the Camera Connect menu, tap on [Images on camera]. In iOS, select [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera connection. Images on the camera are listed when the Wi-Fi connection is established.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Removing a Paired Device’s Registration To pair the camera with a different smartphone, clear the paired device’s registration on the [Bluetooth function] screen (p.436). Steps on the Camera [Check/clear connection 1 Select info]. 2 Press the button. the connection information. 3 Clear zz Select [OK]. Steps on the Smartphone the camera registration.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi function] Menu Steps on the Camera (1) Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. 1 Set zz See steps 1–4 on page 429. [Wi-Fi function]. 2 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. a nickname. 3 Register zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed, register a nickname (p.430). 4 zzIf the history (p.509) is displayed, Select [q] (Connect to smartphone).
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi an item. 6 Select zz If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. zz If Camera Connect is not installed, select [Android] or [iOS] on the screen on the left, scan the displayed QR code with the smartphone, then access Google Play or App Store and install Camera Connect. (1) (2) the SSID (network name) 7 Check and password. zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2) displayed on the camera screen. “_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Steps on the Smartphone Smartphone’s screen (sample) the smartphone to 8 Operate establish a Wi-Fi connection. zz Activate the smartphone’s WiFi function, then select the SSID (network name) checked in step 7. zz For the password, enter the password checked in step 7. Camera Connect. 9 Start zz When the [Waiting to connect] screen is displayed on the camera, start Camera Connect on the smartphone. the camera to connect to via 10 Select Wi-Fi.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi ggThe main window of Camera Connect will be displayed on the smartphone. The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is now complete. zz Operate the camera using Camera Connect. See page 444. zz For how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the WiFi Connection” (p.457). zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (p.509). [qWi-Fi on] Screen Disconnect,exit zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection. Confirm set. zz You can check the settings.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Operating the Camera Using a Smartphone The main functions of Camera Connect are described below. Images on camera zz Images stored in the camera can be viewed. zz Images stored in the camera can be saved on a smartphone. zz Operations such as deletion can be performed on images stored in the camera. Remote live view shooting zz The camera’s Live View image can be viewed on a smartphone. zz You can shoot with remote operation.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi ooIf the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote shooting, the following will occur. • Any movie recording in progress in movie shooting mode will continue. • Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end. ooYou cannot use the camera to shoot after using Camera Connect to switch from still photo shooting mode to movie shooting mode.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Sending Images to a Smartphone Automatically as You Shoot Your shots can be sent automatically. Before following these steps, make sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi. [55: Wireless 1 Select communication settings]. 2 Select [Wi-Fi settings]. [Send to smartphone after 3 Select shot]. 4 Set [Auto send] to [Enable].
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi [Size to send]. 5 Set zz Select the image size, then press <0>. 6 Take the picture.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via Bluetooth (Android devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi. (1) Selecting [Send images to smartphone] to Send Images [55: Wireless 1 Select communication settings]. [Send images to 2 Select smartphone]. ggIf you perform this step while connected via Bluetooth, a message is displayed, and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi connection.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi (2) Sending Images from the Quick Control Screen During Playback 1 Play back the image. 2 Press the button. [q]. 3 Select ggIf you perform this step while connected via Bluetooth, a message is displayed, and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi connection. sending options and send 4 Select the images.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi (3) Selecting Sending Options and Sending the Images Sending Images Individually an image to send. 1 Select zz Press the keys or turn the <5> dial to select an image to send, then press <0>. zz You can press the <1> button and turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to select the image using the index display. [Send img shown]. 2 Select zz In [Size to send], you can select the image sending size.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Sending Multiple Selected Images 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Send selected]. images to send. 3 Select zz Press the keys or turn the <5> dial to select an image to send, then press <0>. zz You can press the <1> button and turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to switch to the three-image display to select the images. To return to the single image display, also press the <1> button and operate the <6> dial. zz After selecting the images to send, press the button.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi image selection. 4 Exit zz Select [OK]. [Size to send]. 5 Select zz Set it as necessary. zz On the displayed screen, select an image size. 6 Select [Send]. Sending a Specified Range of Images 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Send range].
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi the range of images. 3 Specify zz Select the first image (start point), then press <0>. zz Select the last image (end point), then press <0>. zz To cancel the selection, repeat this step. zz You can press the <1> button and turn the <6> dial to change the number of images shown in the index display. the range. 4 Confirm zz Press the button. [Size to send]. 5 Select zz Set it as necessary. zz On the displayed screen, select an image size. 6 Select [Send].
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Sending All Images on the Card 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Send all card]. [Size to send]. 3 Select zz On the displayed screen, select an image size. 4 Select [Send].
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image search conditions] at once. For details on [Set image search conditions], see “Filtering Images for Playback” (p.313). 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Send all found]. [Size to send]. 3 Select zz On the displayed screen, select an image size. 4 Select [Send].
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Ending Image Transfer Sending Images from the Camera When Paired via Bluetooth (Android) zz Press the button on the image transfer screen. zz Select [OK] on the screen at left to end image transfer and the Wi-Fi connection. Sending Images from the Camera over a Wi-Fi Connection zz Press the button on the image transfer screen. zz To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection” (p.457).
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi ooDuring the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed. ooThe camera cannot be connected to multiple smartphones via Wi-Fi when it is connected to another device via Wi-Fi. ooYou can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer. ooYou can select up to 999 files at a time. ooWith a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving function is recommended.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi Specifying Viewable Images You can specify images viewable on a smartphone by operating the camera. Images can be specified after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated. [Wi-Fi function]. 1 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. [q]. 2 Select zz If the history (p.509) is displayed, switch the screen with the keys. 3 Select [Edit device information]. a smartphone.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi 5 Select [Viewable imgs]. an item. 6 Select zz Select [OK] to access the setting screen. [All images] All images stored on the card become viewable. [Images from past days] Specify viewable images on the shooting-date basis. Images shot up to nine days ago can be specified. zz Select an item. zz When [Images shot in past days] is selected, images shot up to the specified number of days before the current date become viewable.
Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi [Select by rating] Specify viewable images depending on whether a rating is appended (or not appended) or by the type of rating. zz Once you select the type of rating, the viewable images are set. [File number range] (Select range) Select the first and last images from images arranged by the file number to specify the viewable images. (1) (1) (2) (2) (3) (4) 460 Press <0> to display the image selection screen. Select an image using the keys or <5> dial.
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and perform camera operations using EOS software or other dedicated software. Install the latest version of EOS software or other dedicated software on the computer before setting up a Wi-Fi connection. For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual. Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can perform a variety of camera operations.
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi [Register a device for 5 Select connection]. (1) the SSID (network name) 6 Check and password. zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2) displayed on the camera screen. zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set [Password] to [None], the password will not be displayed or required. For details, see page 533. (2) Steps on the Computer (1) Computer’s screen (sample) the SSID, then enter the 7 Select password.
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi Steps on the Camera (2) [OK]. 8 Select ggThe following message is displayed. “******” represents the last six digits of the MAC address of the camera to be connected. Steps on the Computer (2) 9 Start EOS Utility. EOS Utility, click [Pairing over 10 InWi-Fi/LAN]. zz If a firewall-related message is displayed, select [Yes]. [Connect]. 11 Click zz Select the camera to connect to, then click [Connect].
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi Steps on the Camera (2) a Wi-Fi connection. 12 Establish zz Select [OK]. [DWi-Fi on] Screen Disconnect,exit zz Terminates the Wi-Fi connection. Confirm set. zz You can check the settings. Error details zz When a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the error. The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete. zz Operate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer. zz To reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (p.509).
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi ooIf the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote shooting, the following will occur. • Any movie recording in progress in movie shooting mode will continue. • Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end. ooOperations using the camera are not possible after you use EOS Utility to switch from still photo shooting mode to movie shooting mode.
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi Sending Images to a Computer Automatically With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on the camera to a computer automatically. Steps on the Computer (1) 1 Connect the computer and access point and start Image Transfer Utility 2. zz In Image Transfer Utility 2, access the pairing settings screen. zz The screen to set up pairing is shown when you follow the instructions displayed the first time Image Transfer Utility 2 starts up.
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi 4 Select [OK]. to an access point via Wi5 Connect Fi. zz Establish a Wi-Fi connection between the camera and the access point connected to the computer. For connection instructions, see “WiFi Connection via Access Points” (p.496). the computer to pair the 6 Select camera with. Steps on the Computer (2) the camera and computer. 7 Pair zz Select the camera, then click [Pairing].
Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi Sending Images on the Camera to a Computer Automatically the [Wi-Fi settings] screen, 1 On select [Auto send images to computer]. 2 Select [Image sending options]. what to send. 3 Select zz If you select [Selected imgs] in [Range to send], specify the images to send on the [Select images to send] screen. the computer and access 4 Connect point via Wi-Fi and start Image Transfer Utility 2.
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi This section describes how to print images by directly connecting the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi. For printer operating instructions, refer to the printer user manual. Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. 1 Set zz See steps 1–4 on page 429. [Wi-Fi function]. 2 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. a nickname. 3 Register zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed, register a nickname (p.430).
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi (1) (2) the SSID (network name) 6 Check and password. zz Check the SSID (1) and password (2) displayed on the camera screen. zz In [Wi-Fi settings], if you set [Password] to [None], the password will not be displayed or required. For details, see page 533. up the printer. 7 Set zz On the Wi-Fi settings menu of the printer to be used, select the SSID you have checked. “_Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi Wi-Fi connection is possible with Wi-Fi printers supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN). To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points” (p.496).
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi Printing Images Printing Images Individually the image to be printed. 1 Select zz Press the keys or turn the <5> dial to select an image to print, then press <0>. zz You can press the button and turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to select the image using the index display. 2 Select [Print image]. the image. 3 Print zz For the print setting procedures, see page 475. zz Select [Print], then [OK] to start printing.
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi Printing by Specifying the Options 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Print order]. the printing options. 3 Set zz For the setting procedures, refer to “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.353). zz If the print order is complete before establishing a Wi-Fi connection, go to step 4. [Print]. 4 Select zz [Print] can be selected only when an image is selected and the printer is ready to print. 5 Set the [Paper settings] (p.475).
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi the image. 6 Print zz When [OK] is selected, printing starts. ooWith a Wi-Fi connection to a printer established, a picture cannot be taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed. ooMovies cannot be printed. ooBefore printing, be sure to set the paper size. ooCertain printers may not be able to imprint the file number. ooIf [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi Print Settings The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer. Also, certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s instruction manual. Print setting screen (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (7) Sets the date or file number imprinting to on or off (p.477). Sets the printing effects (p.477). Sets the quantity to be printed (p.478). Sets the print area (p.479).
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi [Q] Setting the Paper Size zz Select the size of the paper in the printer. [Y] Setting the Paper Type zz Select the type of the paper in the printer. [U] Setting the Page Layout zz Select the page layout. Borderless Bordered xx-up Default Prints with no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless prints, the print will have borders. Prints with white borders along the edges. Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 20 or 35 images on one sheet.
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi Setting the Date/File Number Imprinting zz Select [I]. zz Select what to print. Setting the Printing Effects (Image Optimization) Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer. zz Select [E]. zz Select printing effects. Option [E] Default [E] On Printing Effect Printing effects differ depending on the printer. For details, refer to the printer’s instruction manual. Prints in the printer’s standard colors.
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi Setting the Number of Copies zz Select [R]. zz Select the number of copies to print. The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi Cropping the Image Set cropping immediately before printing. Changing other print settings after you crop images may require you to crop the images again. 1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping]. the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio. 2 Set zz The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The shape of the frame (aspect ratio) can be changed with [Paper settings].
Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi ooDepending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as you specified. ooThe smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will look in the print. Handling Printer Errors If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer. For details on resuming printing, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.
Sending Images to a Web Service This section describes how to use Web services to send images. Registering Web Services Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera. zz A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and other Web services.
Sending Images to a Web Service Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or smartphone. Steps on the Camera (1) Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. 1 Set zz See steps 1–4 on page 429. [Wi-Fi function]. 2 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. a nickname.
Sending Images to a Web Service a Wi-Fi connection. 6 Establish zz Go to step 7 on page 498 (PBC mode), step 7 on page 502 (PIN mode), or step 7 on page 505 (manually). your email address. 7 Enter zz Enter your email address, then select [OK]. a four-digit number. 8 Enter zz Enter a four-digit number of your choice, then select [OK]. [OK]. 9 Select ggThe [R] icon changes to [ ].
Sending Images to a Web Service Steps on the Computer or Smartphone up camera web link. 10 Set zz Access the page in the notification message. zz Follow the instructions to complete the settings on the camera web link settings page. Steps on the Camera (2) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a 11 Add destination. zz Select [ ]. ggCANON iMAGE GATEWAY is now added.
Sending Images to a Web Service Registering Other Web Services Steps on the Computer or Smartphone the Web service you 1 Configure want to use. zz Visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website and access the camera web link settings page. zz Follow the on-screen instructions to complete settings for Web services you want to use. Steps on the Camera the Web service you 2 Add configured as a destination. zz On the [Wi-Fi function] screen, select [ ].
Sending Images to a Web Service Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection [Wi-Fi function]. 1 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. a Web service. 2 Select zz If the history (p.509) is displayed, switch the screen with the keys. zz A screen to select a destination may be displayed, depending on the type and settings of the Web service (p.508).
Sending Images to a Web Service Sending Images to a Web Service You can share images with your family and friends by sending images from the camera to a Web service registered on the camera or by sending Web links of the online albums. Sending Images Individually an image to send. 1 Select zz Press the keys or turn the <5> dial to select an image to send, then press <0>. zz You can press the <1> button and turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to select the image using the index display.
Sending Images to a Web Service Sending Multiple Selected Images 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Send selected]. the images to send. 3 Select zz Press the keys or turn the <5> dial to select an image to send, then press <0>. zz You can press the <1> button and turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to switch to the three-image display to select the images. To return to the single image display, also press the <1> button and operate the <6> dial. zz After selecting the images to send, press the button.
Sending Images to a Web Service [Size to send]. 4 Select zz When YouTube is selected as the destination, [Size to send] is not displayed. zz On the displayed screen, select an image size. [Send]. 5 Select zz On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection. zz When the [Terms of use] screen is displayed, thoroughly read the message, then select [I Agree]. zz To scroll the screen, use the keys.
Sending Images to a Web Service Sending a Specified Range of Images Specify the range of images to send all the images in the range at once. 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Send range]. the range of images. 3 Specify zz Select the first image (start point). zz Select the last image (end point). ggImages will be selected and [X] will appear. zz To cancel the selection, repeat this step. zz You can press the <1> button and turn the <6> dial to change the number of images shown in the index display. the range.
Sending Images to a Web Service [Size to send]. 5 Select zz On the displayed screen, select an image size. [Send]. 6 Select zz On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection. zz When the [Terms of use] screen is displayed, thoroughly read the message, then select [I Agree]. zz To scroll the screen, use the keys. Sending All Images on the Card 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Send all card].
Sending Images to a Web Service [Size to send]. 3 Select zz Set it as necessary. zz On the displayed screen, select an image size. [Send]. 4 Select zz On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection. zz When the [Terms of use] screen is displayed, thoroughly read the message, then select [I Agree]. zz To scroll the screen, use the keys.
Sending Images to a Web Service Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image search conditions] at once. For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Filtering Images for Playback” (p.313). 1 Press <0>. 2 Select [Send all found]. [Size to send]. 3 Select zz Set it as necessary. zz On the displayed screen, select an image size.
Sending Images to a Web Service [Send]. 4 Select zz On the screen after images are sent, select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection. zz When the [Terms of use] screen is displayed, thoroughly read the message, then select [I Agree]. zz To scroll the screen, use the keys.
Sending Images to a Web Service ooWith a Wi-Fi connection to a Web service established, a picture cannot be taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed. ooWhen sending an image to a Web service other than CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, a send error message may not be displayed even if the image has not been sent to the Web service successfully. Since such send errors can be checked on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site, check the error content, then try sending the image again.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point. Checking the Type of Access Point Determine whether the access point for the Wi-Fi connection is compatible with WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), as described in the access point instruction manual or other documentation. zzWhen WPS is supported The following two Wi-Fi connection methods are available. Connection can be established easier with WPS (PBC mode).
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection with WPS (PBC Mode) First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it. It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection. If multiple access points are active nearby and you cannot establish a Wi-Fi connection, try to establish the connection in [WPS (PIN mode)]. Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. 1 Set zz See steps 1–4 on page 429. [Wi-Fi function].
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points [Register a device for 5 Select connection]. zz When [q] (Connect to smartphone) is selected, the screen on the left is displayed. If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. [Switch network]. 6 Select zz Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is selected. 7 Select [Connect with WPS]. For [Camera access point mode] displayed on the screen in step 7, see page 508.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points [WPS (PBC mode)]. 8 Select zz Select [OK]. to the access point via Wi9 Connect Fi. zz Press the access point’s WPS button. zz Select [OK]. [Auto setting]. 10 Select zz Select [OK] to access the setting screen for the Wi-Fi function. zz If [Auto setting] results in an error or if you want to specify the settings manually, see page 535. the settings for the Wi-Fi 11 Specify function.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points [qConnect to smartphone] Go to step 9 on page 442. [DRemote control (EOS Utility)] Go to step 8 on page 463. [lPrint from Wi-Fi printer] Go to step 8 on page 470. Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Go to step 7 on page 483.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection with WPS (PIN Mode) First, check how to enter a PIN code on the access point. It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection. Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. 1 Set zz See steps 1–4 on page 429. [Wi-Fi function]. 2 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. a nickname. 3 Register zz If the [Nickname] screen is displayed, register a nickname (p.430). 4 zzIf the history (p.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points zz When [q] (Connect to smartphone) is selected, the screen on the left is displayed. If Camera Connect is already installed, select [Do not display]. [Switch network]. 6 Select zz Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is selected. 7 Select [Connect with WPS]. [WPS (PIN mode)]. 8 Select zz Select [OK].
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points the PIN code at the access 9 Specify point. zz At the access point, specify the PIN code displayed on the camera screen. zz Once you have entered the PIN code, select [OK]. to the access point via Wi10 Connect Fi. zz Select [OK]. [Auto setting]. 11 Select zz Select [OK] to access the setting screen for the Wi-Fi function. zz If [Auto setting] results in an error or if you want to specify the settings manually, see page 535.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection Manually Establish a Wi-Fi connection by selecting the SSID (or ESS-ID) of the access point for a Wi-Fi connection from a list of active access points nearby. Selecting the Access Point Wi-Fi settings to [Enable]. 1 Set zz See steps 1–4 on page 429. [Wi-Fi function]. 2 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. a nickname.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points [Switch network]. 6 Select zz Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is selected. (1) (2) (3) the access point. 7 Select zz Press the keys to select the access point to connect to via WiFi from the list of access points. (1) SSID (2) An icon is displayed if the access point is encrypted (3) Channel used Refreshing and Manual Settings zz Scroll down the screen in step 7 to display [Manual settings]. zz To search for access points again, select [Refresh].
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points Entering the Access Point Password zz Enter the password specified for the access point. For details on the specified password, refer to the access point’s instruction manual. zz The screens displayed in steps 8 to 9 below vary depending on the authentication and encryption specified for the access point. zz Go to step 10 when the [IP address set.] screen is displayed instead of the screens for steps 8 to 9. a key index.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points Setting the IP Address [Auto setting]. 10 Select zz Select [OK] to access the setting screen for the Wi-Fi function. zz If [Auto setting] results in an error or if you want to specify the settings manually, see page 535. the settings for the Wi-Fi 11 Specify function (p.500). The IP address can only be set automatically in environments using DHCP servers, or access points or routers with DHCP server functionality, and IP addresses, etc.
Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points Send To Screen A screen to select a destination may be displayed depending on the Web service. To register destinations or to specify the settings, you must use a computer. For more information, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual. zz When [m] (Email) or other service is selected on the [Upload to Web service] screen, the [Send to] screen may be displayed. zz Select the destination from the list of registered destinations.
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi Follow these steps to reconnect to devices or Web services with registered connection settings. [Wi-Fi function]. 1 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. an item. 2 Select zz Select the item to connect to via Wi-Fi from the displayed history. If the item is not displayed, press the keys to switch the screen. zz If [Connection history] is set to [Hide], the history will not be displayed (p.533). the connected device.
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi [D] Computer zz On the computer, start the EOS software. zz If the computer’s connection destination has been changed, restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point as the camera. When directly connecting the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi, “_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi Connecting to a Bluetooth-connected Smartphone via Wi-Fi Camera Connect. 1 Start zz Tap on the Camera Connect icon on the smartphone to start the application. a Camera Connect function. 2 Select zz Select the Camera Connect function you want to use. zz A Wi-Fi connection will be automatically established. zz In iOS, select [Join] when a message is displayed to confirm camera connection. When a Wi-Fi connection is established, the screen for the selected function will appear.
Reconnecting via Wi-Fi Registering Multiple Connection Settings You can register up to 20 connection settings for the Wi-Fi function. [Wi-Fi function]. 1 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. an item. 2 Select zz When the screen on the left appears, press the keys to switch the screen. zz Select the item to newly connect to via Wi-Fi from the screen on the left.
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings Change or delete connection settings saved on the camera. To change or delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection first. [Wi-Fi function]. 1 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. an item. 2 Select zz When the screen on the left appears, press the keys to switch the screen. zz From the screen on the left, select the item for which to change or delete the connection settings.
Changing or Deleting Connection Settings or change the connection 5 Check settings. zz Select an item, then change or delete the connection settings on the displayed screen. zzChange device nickname You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard (p.534). zzViewable imgs (p.458) Displayed when [q] (Connect to smartphone) is selected. Settings will appear at the bottom of the screen. zzErase connection information You can delete connection settings saved on the camera.
Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the wireless communication settings, you can prevent their information from being exposed when you lend or give your camera to other people. 1 Select [Clear settings]. [OK]. 2 Select ggWireless communication settings are cleared to default, and the [Wireless communication settings] screen will reappear.
View Info Screen On the [View info] screen, you can check error details and the camera’s MAC address. [Wi-Fi function]. 1 Select zz Select [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless communication settings] screen. an item, then press the 2 Select button. ggThe [View info] screen will appear. zz When an error has occurred, press <0> to display the error content.
Responding to Error Messages When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one of the procedures below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by referring to the examples shown in this chapter. zz On the [View info] screen, press <0> (p.516). zz Select [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on] screen. Click the error code number’s page in the following chart to jump to the corresponding page. 11 (p.518) 21 (p.519) 61 (p.522) 67 (p.524) 91 (p.525) 125 (p.526) 126 (p.526) 141 (p.526) 151 (p.
Responding to Error Messages 11: Connection target not found zz In the case of [q], is Camera Connect running? ggEstablish a connection using Camera Connect (p.442). zz In the case of [l], is the power of the printer on? ggTurn on the printer. zz In the case of [D], is the EOS software running? ggStart the EOS software and reestablish the connection (p.463).
Responding to Error Messages 21: No address assigned by DHCP server What to check on the camera zz On the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct setting? ggIf no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP address to [Manual setting] on the camera (p.535). What to check on the DHCP server zz Is the power of the DHCP server on? ggTurn on the DHCP server.
Responding to Error Messages 22: No response from DNS server What to check on the camera zz On the camera, does the DNS server’s IP address setting match the server’s actual address? ggSet the IP address to [Manual setting]. Then, on the camera, set the IP address that matches the address of the DNS server used (p.531, 535). What to check on the DNS server zz Is the power of the DNS server on? ggTurn on the DNS server.
Responding to Error Messages 23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network What to check on the camera zz Do the camera and another device connected via Wi-Fi to the same network have the same IP address? ggChange the camera’s IP address to avoid using the same address as another device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address of the device that has a duplicate address.
Responding to Error Messages 61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found zz Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna of the access point? ggMove the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of view of the camera (p.528). What to check on the camera zz Does the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point? ggCheck the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the camera (p.505).
Responding to Error Messages 63: Wireless LAN authentication failed zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same authentication method? ggThe camera supports the following authentication methods: [Open system], [Shared key], and [WPA/WPA2-PSK] (p.496). zz Are the camera and the access point set to use the same password for authentication? ggThe setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is set on the camera (p.
Responding to Error Messages 65: Wireless LAN connection lost zz Are any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the antenna of the access point? ggMove the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible from the point of view of the camera (p.528). zz The Wi-Fi connection was lost for some reason, and the connection cannot be restored.
Responding to Error Messages 68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the beginning. zz Did you hold down the access point’s WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button for the specified period of time? ggHold down the WPS button for the period of time specified in the access point’s instruction manual. zz Are you trying to establish a connection near the access point? ggTry establishing the connection when both devices are within reach of each other.
Responding to Error Messages 125: Check the network settings zz Is the network connected? ggCheck the connection status of the network. 126: Could not connect to server zz CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is under maintenance or load is concentrated temporarily. ggTry connecting to the Web service again later. 127: An error has occurred zz A problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the camera is connected to the Web service. ggTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the Web service.
Responding to Error Messages 151: Transmission canceled zz Automatic image transfer to the computer was somehow interrupted. ggTo resume automatic image transfer, set the camera’s power switch to <2>, and then set it to <1>. 152: Card’s write protect switch is set to lock zz Is the card’s write-protect switch set to the locked position? ggSlide the card’s write-protect switch to the writing position.
Wireless Communication Function Notes If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems occur when using the wireless communication functions, try the following corrective actions. Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not be established even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In such a case, bring the camera and the smartphone closer together, then establish a Wi-Fi connection.
Wireless Communication Function Notes Cautions for Using Multiple Cameras zz When connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi, make sure the cameras’ IP addresses are different. zz When multiple cameras are connected to one access point via WiFi, the transmission rate drops. zz When there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band) access points, leave a gap of five channels between each Wi-Fi channel to reduce radio wave interference.
Security If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may occur. zzTransmission monitoring Third parties with malicious intent may monitor the Wi-Fi transmissions and attempt to acquire the data you are sending. zzUnauthorized network access Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Checking Network Settings zzWindows Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then type ipconfig/all and press the key. In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information are also displayed. zzMac OS In Mac OS X, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifconfig -a, and press the key. The IP address assigned to the computer is indicated in the [en0] item next to [inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.
[Wireless communication settings] Screen On the [Wireless communication settings] screen, you can change the wireless communication function settings. Select [55: Wireless communication settings]. Wi-Fi settings zz See the next page. Wi-Fi function The following Wi-Fi functions are available: zz Communicate with smartphone zz Remote control (EOS Utility) zz Print from Wi-Fi printer zz Send images to Web service Bluetooth function (p.
[Wi-Fi settings] Screen Wi-Fi zz You can set whether to [Enable] or [Disable] the wireless communication function. zz When the use of electronic devices and wireless devices is prohibited, such as on board airplanes or in hospitals, set it to [Disable]. Password Set to [None] to allow a Wi-Fi connection to be established without a password (except when connecting to an access point via Wi-Fi). Connection history You can set whether to [Show] or [Hide] the history of the Wi-Fi connected devices.
Virtual Keyboard Operation (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) Input area, for entering text Cursor keys, for moving in the input area Current no. of characters/no. available Keyboard (7) (8) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (9) Switch input modes Space Delete a character in the input area Change the type of keyboard Finish the text entry zz Press the keys to move within 2 and 4–8. zz Press <0> to confirm input or when switching input modes.
Setting the IP Address Manually Set up the IP address settings manually. The items displayed vary depending on the Wi-Fi function. [Manual setting]. 1 Select zz Select [OK]. an item. 2 Select zz Select an item to access the screen for numerical input. zz To use a gateway, select [Enable], then select [Address]. the desired values. 3 Enter zz Turn the <6> dial to move the input position in the upper area and turn the <5> dial to select the number. Press <0> to enter the selected number.
Setting the IP Address Manually [OK]. 4 Select zz When you have completed setting the necessary items, select [OK]. zz If you are not sure what to enter, see “Checking Network Settings” (p.531), or ask the network administrator or another person knowledgeable about the network.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display Wireless communication status can be checked on the camera screen and LCD panel.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display Bluetooth Function Indicator Bluetooth function Other than [Disable] [Disable] 538 Connection status Bluetooth connected Bluetooth not connected Bluetooth not connected Screen LCD Panel Not displayed Not displayed
7 Custom Functions / My Menu You can fine-tune camera functions and change the functionality of buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences with Custom Functions and control customization. You can also add menu items and Custom Functions that you adjust frequently to My Menu tabs.
Tab Menus: Customization zzC.Fn1 p.542 p.542 p.543 p.543 p.544 p.545 p.546 zzC.Fn2 p.547 p.547 p.548 zzC.Fn3 p.548 p.548 p.549 p.
Tab Menus: Customization zzC.Fn4 p.555 p.555 p.561 p.555 zzC.Fn5 p.550 p.551 p.551 p.552 p.553 zzC.Fn6 p.
Custom Function SettingsN You can customize camera features on the [8] tab to suit your shooting preferences. Any settings you change from default values are displayed in blue. C.Fn1 Exposure level increments Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. [1/3] 1/3-stop [1/2] 1/2-stop When [1/2-stop] is set, the display will be as shown below.
Custom Function Settings Bracketing auto cancel Specify whether AEB and white balance bracketing settings are canceled when you set the power switch to <2> or switch to movie recording. [ON] Enable [OFF] Disable Bracketing sequence The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed.
Custom Function Settings Number of bracketed shots The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed from the default of 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots. When [81: Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, -, +], the bracketed shots will be taken as shown in the table below.
Custom Function Settings Safety shift If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually selected setting to obtain the standard exposure. When set to [Shutter speed/Aperture], applies to [s] and [f] mode. When set to [ISO speed], applies to [d], [s], and [f] mode. [OFF] Disable [Tv/Av] Shutter speed/Aperture [ISO] ISO speed ooUnder [z3: zISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.
Custom Function Settings Same exposure for new aperture Maximum aperture may decrease (the lowest f/number may increase) in [a] mode (manual exposure shooting) with ISO speed set manually (except when set to ISO Auto) if you 1. Change lenses, 2. Attach an extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens with a variable maximum aperture. This function prevents the corresponding underexposure by adjusting ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically to maintain the same exposure as before 1, 2, or 3.
Custom Function Settings C.Fn2 Set shutter speed range You can set the shutter speed range. In [t], [s] and [a] mode, you can set the shutter speed manually within your specified range. In [d] and [f] mode, or in [t] mode with shutter speed set to [AUTO], the shutter speed is set automatically within your specified range (except for movie shooting). Select [OK] to register the setting. [Lowest speed] Can be set in a range of 30 sec.–1/4000 sec. [Highest speed] Can be set in a range of 1/8000 sec.–15 sec.
Custom Function Settings AE lock metering mode after focus For each metering mode, you can set whether to lock the exposure (AE lock) after achieving focus with One-Shot AF by pressing the shutter button halfway. The exposure will be locked while you keep pressing the shutter button halfway. Checkmark [X] the metering modes for when AE lock is to be applied. Select a metering mode [q/w/r/e], then press <0> to append a checkmark [X]. Select [OK] to register the setting. C.
Custom Function Settings Focus ring rotation RF lens focusing ring turning direction can be reversed. [ ] Normal [ ] Reverse direction RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity RF lens focusing ring sensitivity can be set. [ ] Varies with rotation speed [ ] Linked to rotation degree C.Fn4 For details on the [84] tab, see “Customizing Operations” (p.555).
Custom Function Settings C.Fn5 Add cropping information Adding cropping information displays vertical lines for your specified aspect ratio, so that you can compose shots as if shooting with a medium- or largeformat camera (6×6 cm, 4×5 inch, and so on). When you shoot, instead of cropping images recorded to the card, the camera adds aspect ratio information to images for cropping in Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
Custom Function Settings Default Erase option You can set the default option in the erase menu (p.335) accessed by pressing the button during image playback or review after shooting. You can simply press <0> to erase the image immediately. [ ] [Cancel] selected [ ] [Erase]/[Erase1+JPEG] selected [ ] [Erase1] selected [ ] [EraseJPEG] selected Be careful not to erase images accidentally when an option other than [Cancel] is set.
Custom Function Settings Retract lens on power off This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You can set whether to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s power switch is set to <2>. [ON] Enable [OFF] Disable ooWith auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting. ooBefore detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
Custom Function Settings Add IPTC information Registering IPTC (International Press Telecommunications Council) information to the camera from EOS Utility (EOS software) enables you to record (add) this information to JPEG/RAW still photos at the time of shooting. This is helpful in file management and other tasks using the IPTC information. For instructions on registering IPTC information to the camera and details on the information you can register, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
Custom Function Settings C.Fn6 Clear all Custom Functions (C.Fn) Selecting [86: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] clears all Custom Function settings. Customized operations for [84] are not cleared if you perform [86: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)]. Note that although information added using [85: Add IPTC information] is retained, the setting changes to [Disable].
Customizing OperationsN You can assign frequently used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences for easy operations. an item on the [84] tab. 1 Select zz [Customize buttons]: Assign functions to buttons, such as or . zz [Customize dials]: Assign functions to dials, such as <6> or <5>. zz [Customize M-Fn bar] (p.561): Assign functions to the bar. a camera control.
Customizing Operations Functions Available for Buttons Function L Metering and AF start k k k k AF stop k k k AE lock, AF stop k k k AF point selection k k k Direct AF point selection AF Set AF point to center k k k Direct AF method selection*1 k k k One-Shot AFzServo AF*1 k k k Touch & drag AF k k k Eye Detection AF*1 k k k k k k AE lock k k k AE lock (hold) k k k k k k Flash function settings*1 k k k FE lock*1 k k k Movies k k k k k Focu
Customizing Operations k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k 557
Customizing Operations Function Dial function settings L k Press buttons directly Short press: LCD information switching Long press: LCD illumination k LCD panel illumination k k k LCD panel information switching k k k Shooting mode settings k k k k Menu Depth-of-field preview*1 k k k Reset selected item in Fv mode*1 k k k Reset Tv/Av/O/ISO in Fv mode*1 k k k Quick Control screen k k k Magnify/Reduce k k k Menu display k k k Image quality*1 k k k One-touch ima
Customizing Operations k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k
Customizing Operations Functions Available for Dials Function 6 5 Shutter speed setting in M mode k k Aperture setting in M mode k Set ISO speed (5during metering) k k Change aperture (hold metering button) k Change shutter speed (hold metering button) k Set ISO speed (hold metering button) k Exposure compensation (hold metering button) k Change aperture value k Change shutter speed k Set ISO speed k Exposure compensation No function (disabled) : Control ring on RF lenses and mo
Customizing Operations Customizing the M-Fn (Multi-Function) Bar 1 Select [84: Customize M-Fn bar]. [z] (for use when shooting) 2 Select or [x] (for use during playback). zz You can assign different functions to each. a function to assign. 3 Select zz Selecting [z] (for shooting) or [x] (for playback) displays a screen of available functions. From the list, select functions to assign. zz Depending on your selected function, different functions can be assigned to swiping or tapping each end.
Customizing Operations functions to swiping 4 Assign or tapping each end. ] (swipe), [ ] (tap zz Selecting [ left end), or [ ] (tap right end) displays a screen to assign functions. zz Select options to assign to each operation. zzzM-Fn bar safety lock To prevent unintended operations during shooting, safety lock is set by default. Note that operations are always possible during playback. ●●To activate during shooting, press the left end of ] is displayed in white.
Customizing Operations zzFull Cover Setting When [Full cover setting] is enabled, you can access the M-Fn bar customization screen by fully covering . ●●To configure this setting, press the button on the screen in step 2. ooIf you prefer not to use at all, select [Not assigned] in step 3. ooYour current action is indicated on the screen when you use . ooTo assign your preferred function to bar operations, select [User customization] when assigning functions.
Customizing Operations Functions Available for the M-Fn Bar Function z x ISO speed ISO speed White balance White balance selection Color temperature setting Check focus/ display info Magnify/reduce by swiping Movie recording Sound-recording level Volume Aperture setting Flexiblepriority AE Select by swiping [t] AF Set autofocus method User Manual Selection customization Function Swipe to browse images shortcut Image Swipe to browse images browsing Change value/selected item Auto ISO speed C
Tab Menus: My Menu p.566 p.569 p.569 p.
Registering My MenuN Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently. Creating and Adding My Menu Tab 1 Select [Add My Menu tab]. [OK]. 2 Select zz You can create up to five My Menu tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2. Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s) 1 Select [MY MENU*: Configure].
Registering My Menu 2 Select [Select items to register]. the desired items. 3 Register zz Select the item to be set, then press <0>. zz Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog. zz You can register up to six items. zz To return to the screen in step 2, press the button. My Menu Tab Settings You can sort and delete items under the menu tab, and rename or delete the menu tab. zzSort registered items You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu.
Registering My Menu zzDelete tab You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab. zzRename tab You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*]. 1 Select [Rename tab]. text. 2 Enter zz Press the button to delete any unnecessary characters. zz Use the cross keys or <5> dial to select a character, then press <0>. zz By selecting [ ], you can change the input mode. zz You can enter up to 16 characters. input.
Registering My Menu Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items You can delete all the created My Menu tabs or My Menu items registered under them. zzDelete all My Menu tabs You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default. zzDelete all items You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain.
Registering My Menu Menu Display Settings You can select [Menu display] to set the menu screen that is to appear first when you press the button. zzNormal display Displays the last displayed menu screen. zzDisplay from My Menu tab Displays with the [9] tab selected. zzDisplay only My Menu tab Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The [z], [2], [3], [5], and [8] tabs will not be displayed.
8 Reference This chapter provides reference information on camera features.
Software Overview You can download the latest version of EOS software or other dedicated software from the Canon website. Downloading and Installing the Software When using EOS software or other dedicated software, use the latest version available. To download it, you will need to enter the serial number on the bottom of the camera. ooDo not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software. The software will not be installed correctly.
Software Overview (1) Double-click the dmg file. ggA drive icon and installer file will appear on the desktop. If the installer file does not appear, double-click the drive icon to display it. (2) Double-click the installer file. ggThe installer starts. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon Web site to your computer.
Importing Images to a Computer You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer. There are two ways to do this. Importing by Connecting the Camera to the Computer 1 Install the software (p.572). the camera to the 2 Connect computer. zz When connecting the cable to the camera, use the cable protector (p.37) and insert the plug in the digital terminal. zz Insert the other end of the cable into the computer’s USB terminal (Type-C). EOS Utility to import the 3 Use images.
Importing Images to a Computer Importing Images with a Card Reader You can use a card reader to import images to a computer. 1 Install the software (p.572). 2 Insert the card into the card reader. Digital Photo Professional to 3 Use import the images. zz Refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual. When importing images from the camera to a computer with a card reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the computer.
Charging a Battery in the Camera Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1 (sold separately), you can charge Battery Pack LP-E6N without removing it from the camera. Note that Battery Pack LP-E6 cannot be charged this way. Also, charging will stop if you operate the camera. the USB power adapter. 1 Connect zz With the camera’s power switch to <2>, insert the USB power adapter plug fully into the digital terminal. the power cord.
Charging a Battery in the Camera ooIf the access lamp does not light up, try unplugging the USB power adapter and plugging it in again. ooThe charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on ambient temperature and remaining capacity. ooIf the battery’s remaining capacity (p.387) is approx. 90% or higher, the battery will not be recharged. ooFor safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5‒10°C / 41‒50°F) will take longer.
Using a Battery Grip Featuring buttons and dials for vertical shooting, Battery Grip BG-E22 (sold separately) is an EOS R accessory that can power the camera with two batteries and charge LP-E6N via a USB power adapter (sold separately). the contact covers. 1 Remove zz Remove the contact covers on the (1) bottom of the camera (1) and on the battery grip (2), (3). (2) (3) zz Attach the battery grip contact cover (2) to (3) to store it.
Using a Battery Grip the battery compartment 2 Remove cover. zz Turn the camera off and remove the cover. zz With the cover off, remove the battery (p.43). zz Attach the cover to the battery grip. zz To remove the cover, slide the lever to release it, following the attachment procedure in reverse. and lock the battery grip. 3 Attach zz Insert the battery grip contacts into the camera and turn the attach/detach dial to lock the battery grip in place.
Using a Battery Grip 4 Remove the battery magazine. ooWhen reattaching the battery compartment cover to the camera, attach it opened to at least 90°. ooDo not touch the camera or battery grip contacts.
Using a Battery Grip Attaching Batteries the batteries. 1 Attach zz Insert the batteries as shown. zz When only one battery is used, it can be inserted in either position. zz To secure the batteries, push in the direction of the arrows until they click into place. zz To remove the batteries, press the battery magazine lever in the direction of the arrow. the battery magazine. 2 Attach zz Insert the battery magazine all the way in to secure it.
Using a Battery Grip ooWhen attaching batteries, make sure the electrical contacts are clean. Wipe off any dirt on the contacts with a soft cloth. ooAttach batteries after attaching the battery grip to the camera. If the battery grip is attached to the camera with batteries already attached, it may prevent correct display of battery check results. ooBefore removing the battery grip, turn the camera off and remove the batteries.
Using a Battery Grip the battery magazine. 2 Attach zz Guide the end of the cord out of the cord hole. the DC coupler to the AC 3 Connect adapter. zz Securely connect the DC coupler’s plug to the connector of AC Adapter AC-E6 (sold separately). the power cord. 4 Connect zz Connect the power cord to the AC adapter and insert the power plug into a power outlet. ooWhile the camera is on, do not connect or disconnect the power cord or connector, and do not remove the battery magazine.
Using a Battery Grip Button and Dial Operations zz To use the buttons and dials, turn the vertical-grip operation switch (4) to ON. zz The buttons and dials are used the same way as corresponding buttons and dials on the camera.
Using a Battery Grip Using a Flash with a PC Sync Cord zz The PC terminal enables you to use flash units with a PC sync cord. zz The PC sync cord can be used regardless of polarity. zz When configuring settings, use approx. 1/60–1/30 sec. as a guideline for sync speed. Confirm in advance that the flash unit is synced correctly. Do not connect flash units with an output voltage of 250 V or more to the PC terminal.
Using a Battery Grip Charging Batteries in the Battery Grip Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1, you can charge LP-E6N batteries without removing them from the battery grip. ooYou can also charge a single LP-E6N battery at one time. Or, you can charge the battery grip by itself. ooLP-E6 cannot be charged this way. If LP-E6N and LP-E6 batteries are both attached, neither will be charged. ooCharging stops if you operate the camera. the USB power adapter.
Using a Battery Grip ooTo protect batteries and keep them in optimal condition, do not charge continuously for more than 24 hours. ooIn case of charging problems, the charge lamp blinks and a protective circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord, reattach the battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Troubleshooting Guide If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center. Power-Related Problems Batteries cannot be charged with the charger. ●●If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.387) is 94% or higher, the battery will not be recharged. ●●Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LPE6N/LP-E6. The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
Troubleshooting Guide Batteries cannot be charged with the USB power adapter (sold separately). ●●Batteries are not charged while the camera’s power switch is set to <1>. ●●Note that Battery Pack LP-E6 cannot be charged this way. ●●If the battery’s remaining capacity is approx. 90% or higher, the battery will not be recharged. ●●Operating the camera will stop charging in progress. ●●When using a battery grip, insert the USB power adapter plug fully into the battery grip terminal to charge the batteries.
Troubleshooting Guide The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power switch is <2>. ●●If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When the image recording is complete, the power will turn off automatically. [Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is displayed. ●●Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LPE6N/LP-E6.
Troubleshooting Guide Shooting-Related Problems The lens cannot be attached. ●●To attach EF or EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses. No images can be shot or recorded. ●●Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.44). ●●Slide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (p.44). ●●If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make space (p.44, 335).
Troubleshooting Guide The image is out of focus or blurred. ●●Set the lens’s focus mode switch to (p.50, 53). ●●Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.56). ●●With a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>. ●●In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter speed (p.134), set a higher ISO speed (p.83), use flash (p.177), or use a tripod. ●●See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on page 124. I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
Troubleshooting Guide The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower. ●●If you shoot a subject that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the number listed on page 609. Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for continuous shooting does not change. ●●The maximum burst displayed does not change when you switch cards, even if you switch to a high-speed card.
Troubleshooting Guide ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected. ●●Check the [ISO speed range] setting under [z3: zISO speed settings]. ●●When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced], the available ISO speed range is ISO 200–40000 for still photo shooting. Even if you set [ISO speed range] under [zISO speed settings] to expand the setting range, you cannot select L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
Troubleshooting Guide Using flash in [f] or [d] mode lowers the shutter speed. ●●Under [z2: External Speedlite control], set [Slow synchro] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] (p.181). The flash does not fire. ●●Make sure the flash is securely attached to the camera. The flash always fires at full output. ●●Flash units other than EL/EX series Speedlites used in autoflash mode always fire at full output (p.178).
Troubleshooting Guide High-speed sync is not available in [f] or [d] mode. ●●Under [z2: External Speedlite control], set [Slow synchro] to [1/200-30sec. auto] or [1/200-1/60sec. auto] (p.181). Remote control shooting is not possible. ●●When taking still photos, set the drive mode to or (p.147). When shooting movies, set [z2: Remote control] to [Enable] (p.245). ●●Check the position of the remote control’s release timing switch.
Troubleshooting Guide Movie shooting stops by itself. ●●If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 611. To find out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website, etc. ●●Recording stops automatically once your movie reaches 29 min. 59 sec. (or 7 min. 29 sec. for a High Frame Rate movie). The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting. ●●In shooting modes other than [M], the ISO speed is set automatically.
Troubleshooting Guide The exposure changes during movie shooting. ●●If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the changes in the exposure may be recorded. ●●Shooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming during movie shooting. Zooming as you shoot movies may cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of focus. The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting.
Troubleshooting Guide Problems with Wireless Features Wi-Fi function cannot be set. ●●If the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an interface cable, Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the interface cable before setting any functions (p.426). A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used. ●●Other devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to devices via Wi-Fi.
Troubleshooting Guide Cannot pair with a smartphone. ●●A previously paired smartphone cannot be paired with the camera again if the camera’s registration is retained on the smartphone. In such a case, remove the camera’s registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on the smartphone and try pairing again (p.439). Operation Problems I cannot change the setting with <6>, <5>, , , or . ●●Press the button to unlock the controls (p.60). ●●Check the [56: Multi function lock] setting (p.416).
Troubleshooting Guide Display Problems The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items. ●●In [A] mode, some tabs and items are not displayed. Tabs and items on the menu screen also vary for still photos and movies. The display starts with [9] My Menu or the [9] tab alone is displayed. ●●[9Set up: Menu display] is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or [Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] (p.570). The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”). ●●Set [z4: Color space] to [sRGB].
Troubleshooting Guide The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect. ●●Make sure the correct date and time are set (p.380). ●●Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.380). The date and time are not in the image. ●●The shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.353). [###] is displayed.
Troubleshooting Guide Playback Problems Part of the image blinks in black. ●●[33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.309). A red box is displayed on the image. ●●[33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.309). During image playback, the AF points are not displayed. ●●The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are played back: • Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied. • Cropped images. • Images captured with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable] in HDR shooting.
Troubleshooting Guide Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard during movie playback. ●●If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (p.202). The movie appears to freeze momentarily. ●●If there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure movie shooting, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes.
Troubleshooting Guide My card reader does not recognize the card. ●●Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable, then import the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software). The image cannot be resized. ●●With this camera, you cannot resize JPEG b and RAW images (p.345). The image cannot be cropped. ●●With this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (p.
Troubleshooting Guide Sensor Cleaning Problems The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning. ●●Under [53: Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a mechanical sound during the cleaning, but no picture will be recorded to the card (p.391). Automatic sensor cleaning does not work. ●●If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> and <2> within a short time period, the icon may not be displayed (p.48). Computer Connection Problems I cannot import images to a computer.
Error Codes (1) If there is a problem with the camera, an error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions. (1) (2) Error number Cause and countermeasures (2) Number 01 02 Error Message and Solution Communication between the devices is faulty. Check the camera, lens, or mount adapter contacts. Clean the electrical contacts on the camera, lens, and mount gg adapter, use a Canon lens, or reinstall the battery (p.30, 43). Card cannot be accessed.
Performance Data Still Photo Shooting zzNumber of Possible Shots Temperature Possible shots (Approx. number of shots) Room Temperature (23°C / 73°F) 370 Low Temperature (0°C / 32°F) 350 • Based on using the screen and a fully charged battery pack (LP-E6N), with [54: Disp. performance] set to [Smooth], and following CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
Performance Data zzGuide to Image Quality Settings Image Quality JPEG 73 83 74 84 7a 8a b RAW 1 1:U F F:U RAW+JPEG 1 73 F 73 Pixels Recorded (Approx.) Maximum Burst High Standard Speed File Size (MB) Possible Shots 3.8M 8.4 4.4 4.7 2.6 3.1 1.8 1.6 3570 6770 6460 11510 9700 16040 18830 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 30M 30M 30M 30M 31.3 55.2 17.3 27.8 970 520 1770 1000 34 17 61 150 47 Full 78 Full 30M 30M 30M 30M 31.3 8.4 17.3 8.
Performance Data zzPixel Count When Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio is Set (Approx. pixels) Image Quality 3/1/F Full-frame (3:2) 1.6x (crop) a 6720x4480 (30.1 megapixels) 4464x2976 (13.3 megapixels) 4176x2784 (11.6 megapixels) – a 3360x2240 (7.5 megapixels) – b 2400x1600 (3.8 megapixels) 2400x1600 (3.8 megapixels) Image Quality 3/1/F a a b 1:1 (aspect ratio) 4:3 (aspect ratio) 16:9 (aspect ratio) 4480x4480 (20.1 megapixels) 2976x2976 (8.9 megapixels) 2240x2240 (5.
Performance Data Movie Shooting zzCards that Can Record Movies Movie Recording Quality H 65B4 87 L 5 65B4 65B4 HDR movie 65 87 w 65 HDR movie 23 W X W X W X SD Card UHS-II, Video Speed Class 60 or higher UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher SD Speed Class 10 or higher UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher SD Speed Class 4 or higher V W X X SD Speed Class 4 or higher SD Speed Class 10 or higher SD Speed Class 4 or higher W UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher SD Speed
Performance Data zzTotal Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute (Approx.) Movie Recording Quality H 65 B4 87 L 5 W X W X 65 W B4 65 X B4 HDR movie 11 min. 46 min. 3 hr. 06 min. 654 MB/min. 35 min. 2 hr. 20 min. 9 hr. 23 min. 216 MB/min. V 1 hr. 26 min. 13 min. W 87 40 min. X 65 X 1 hr. 20 min. HDR movie 6 min. 23 W 65 w Total Possible Recording Time on Card File size 8 GB 32 GB 128 GB 2 min. 8 min. 35 min. 3444 MB/min. 8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 21 min. 860 MB/min. 5 min. 23 min. 1 hr.
Performance Data zzTotal Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting (Approx.) Time-lapse Movie Shooting Interval 2 sec. 10 sec. Screen Auto Off Disable Enable Disable Enable Room Temperature (23°C / 73°F) 4 hr. 30 min. 7 hr. 10 min. 4 hr. 20 min. 7 hr. 30 min. Low Temperature (0°C / 32°F) 4 hr. 6 hr. 30 min. 3 hr. 50 min. 6 hr. 50 min. • With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N. • The possible movie shooting time varies depending on the shooting conditions.
Performance Data ISO Speed in Movie Shooting In [y] Mode zz For HD/Full HD and High Frame Rate movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–25600. zz For 4K movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–12800. In [k], [t], and [v] Modes zz For HD/Full HD and High Frame Rate movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–25600. zz For 4K movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–12800.
Performance Data In [M] Mode zz For HD/Full HD and High Frame Rate movies with ISO speed set to [AUTO], it is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–25600. zz For 4K movies with ISO speed set to [AUTO], ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–12800. zz When setting ISO Auto, setting [ISO Auto] or [HISO Auto] under [z3: kISO speed settings] to [Max.:H2(102400)] (p.246) expands the maximum speed in the automatic ISO speed setting range to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
Performance Data Image Playback zzResize Options by Original Image Quality Available Resize Settings Original Image Quality 4 a b 3* k k k k k 4 k a * Only b is available for images shot with [z1: zCropping/aspect ratio] set to [1.6x (crop)]. zzSize for Resized Images (Approx. pixels) Image Quality Full-frame (3:2) 1.6x (crop) 4 a b 4464x2976 (13.3 megapixels) 3360x2240 (7.5 megapixels) 2400x1600 (3.8 megapixels) – – 2400x1600 (3.
Information Display LCD Panel Still photo/movie standby screen 1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) Multi-function lock Shooting mode Battery level Flash exposure compensation Exposure compensation Bluetooth function Wi-Fi function Shutter speed Aperture Movie Av 1/8-stop increments Exposure level indicator/Exposure compensation amount/ AEB range (12) ISO speed (13) Highlight tone priority/ISO speed expansion Still photo standby screen 2
Information Display Movie standby screen 2 (1) (4) (2) (5) (6) (3) (7) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) AF method Movie digital IS Image size White balance Canon Log Movie recording time available Frame rate (1) (2) Elapsed recording time Recording in progress/External recording in progress (HDMI, 10-bit) Movie recording in progress (2) (1) 618
Information Display Still Photo Shooting Screen Each time you press the button, the information display will change. zz Viewfinder display positions vary for some items. zz The display will show only the settings currently applied. (1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (12) (13) (14) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) Movie recording time available Maximum burst Possible shots/Sec.
Information Display (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (30) (37) (38) (39) (40) (31) (41) (29) (24) Flash ready/Flash off/FE lock/ High-speed sync (25) Silent shutter (26) Touch shutter (27) AE lock (28) Shutter speed/Multi-function lock warning (29) Flash exposure compensation (30) Aperture (31) Exposure level indicator (32) (33) (34) (35) (36) (37) (38) (39) (40) (41) Focus distance display Bluetooth function Exposure simulation Magnify button ISO speed Highlight tone priority Wi-F
Information Display Movie Shooting Screen Each time you press the button, the information display will change. zz Viewfinder display positions vary for some items. zz The display will show only the settings currently applied.
Information Display (22) (29) (23) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (22) Sound-recording level indicator (manual) (23) Canon Log (24) AE lock (25) Shutter speed (26) View Assist (27) Wi-Fi function (28) (29) (30) (31) (32) (33) (34) Aperture Exposure level indicator ISO speed Highlight tone priority Exposure compensation Focus distance display Bluetooth function ooYou can set what is displayed for when you press the button (p.397).
Information Display Scene Icons In [A] or [y] shooting mode, the camera detects the type of scene, and all settings are configured accordingly. The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen.
Information Display *4: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed. *5: Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod. *6: Displayed with any of the lenses below: • • • • EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM EF500mm f/4L IS II USM EF600mm f/4L IS II USM • Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.
Information Display Playback Screen zzBasic information display for still photos (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (5) (6) (7) (13) (14) (15) Wi-Fi function Wi-Fi signal strength Battery level Playback No.
Information Display zzDetailed information display for still photos (8) (1) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (2) (3) (4) (16) (5) (6) (7) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Aperture Shutter speed Shooting mode/Multiple exposure/Time-lapse movie White balance Auto Lighting Optimizer White balance correction Picture Style/Settings Exposure compensation amount Shooting date and time (17) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) Histogram (Brightness/RGB) ISO speed Highlight tone priority Scroll bar Flash exposure
Information Display zzDetailed information display for movies (1) (1) (2) (3) (4) (2) (6) (3) (4) (5) (7) (8) Movie playback Picture Style: Settings Canon Log: Characteristics Movie recording size Frame Rate (5) (6) (7) (8) Compression rate HDR movie/Movie digital IS Recording time Movie recording format During movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and [Threshold] of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].
Trademarks ooAdobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. ooMicrosoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. ooMacintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ooSDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. ooHDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
About MPEG-4 Licensing “This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.” * Notice displayed in English as required.
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine accessories is highly recommended. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery).
----------- ■ 631
632
Index Numeric [4K] 3840x2160 (Movie)..................... 192 [4K] 3840x2160 (Time-lapse movie)............................. 225 [A+] (Scene Intelligent Auto).............. 123 [C1]/[C2] (Custom shooting).............. 417 AF function customization............... 288 AF method....................................... 265 AF operation............................ 262, 274 AF point selection............................ 271 AF point size.................................... 276 AF speed...........................
Index Autofocus 9 AF Auto Lighting Optimizer...................... 104 Holding the camera........................... 55 Camera shake.................................... 125 Auto power off.................................... 377 Canon Log.......................................... 236 Auto reset........................................... 369 Card requirements.......................197, 611 Av (Aperture-priority AE)..................... 136 Cards.........................
Index Custom shooting mode...................... 417 Custom white balance........................ 100 D Dust Delete Data................................ 121 E Eco mode........................................... 376 D+....................................................... 109 Electronic level................................... 397 Date/time............................................ 380 Erasing images................................... 335 Daylight saving time...........................
Index File size.............................. 200, 609, 612 For editing (ALL-I).............................. 195 Filter effect (Monochrome)................... 94 Formatting (card initialization)............ 373 Fine Detail............................................ 89 Frame Grab........................................ 329 Fine (Image-recording quality)............. 75 Frame rate.................................. 195, 384 Fineness (Sharpness).......................... 93 Free run.................
Index High dynamic range 9 HDR Jump display (image browsing)........311 High Frame Rate................................ 199 Magnifying images.......................... 315 High ISO speed noise reduction......... 105 Manual reset.................................... 369 Highlight alert..................................... 309 Highlight tone priority.......................... 109 High-speed continuous shooting........ 144 High-speed display............................. 149 Histogram.....................
Index Jump display.......................................311 L Malfunction......................................... 588 Manual exposure................................ 138 Manual focus...................................... 255 Landscape............................................ 89 Manual focusing................................. 281 Language........................................... 383 Manual reset....................................... 369 Large (image-recording quality)...........
Index Canon Log....................................... 236 Rec run............................................ 205 Cards suited for movie shooting.......611 Shutter-priority AE........................... 210 Compression method...................... 195 Shutter speed.................................. 215 Cropped shooting............................ 219 Sound recording/ Drop frame...................................... 208 Sound-recording level..................... 202 Editing.......................
Index P PAL............................................. 195, 384 Partial metering.................................. 152 Part names........................................... 31 PC terminal......................................... 585 Peripheral illumination correction..................................... 111, 343 Photobook set-up............................... 357 Program AE........................................ 132 Program shift................................... 133 Protecting images.................
Index Scene Intelligent Auto......................... 123 Shooting range................................... 400 Screen............................................ 30, 47 Shutter button....................................... 56 Adjusting angle............................ 47, 55 Shutter button functions..................... 404 Brightness....................................... 378 Shutter-priority AE.............................. 134 Color tone........................................
Index Tilt correction...................................... 347 Information display.......................... 398 Time code........................................... 205 Vertical display................................ 399 Time-lapse movie............................... 224 Viewfinder off...................................... 377 Time zone........................................... 380 Viewing on a television............... 324, 333 Tone priority........................................
Index Manual setting.............................. 535 SSID................................ 441, 462, 470 MAC address........................... 496, 516 Switch network................ 498, 502, 505 Network........................... 441, 462, 470 Use with EOS software................... 461 Network settings.............................. 531 Auto send..................................... 466 Nickname........................................ 514 EOS Utility....................................
canon The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of October 2018. For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual, refer to the Canon Web site. CPH-E508-001 © CANON INC.
Introduction/ Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RAW Image Processing, Viewing and Editing Software Downloading Images Digital Photo Professional Viewing Images Ver. 4.9 Instruction Manual Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Content of this Instruction Manual DPP stands for Digital Photo Professional. In this manual, the screens used in the basic operation instructions are from Windows 8.1. indicates the selection procedure of the menu.
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING! CANON SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT - READ THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE ON THE CD-ROM IN THIS BOX. BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. This is a license agreement (the [Agreement]) between you and Canon Inc. ([Canon]).
Introduction Main Features of DPP Introduction/ Contents Color management compatibility CMYK simulation for commercial printing Following are the main tasks you can perform with images you have downloaded to your computer. * JPEG/TIFF indicates processing that can be performed with JPEG or TIFF images as well as RAW images.
Introduction/ Contents System Requirements OS (operating Windows 10 (Version 1607 or later)*, Windows 8.1*, system) Windows 7* Model PC with one of the above OS preinstalled (Upgraded machines not supported) CPU Core 2 Duo 2.0 GHz or higher (recommended Core i series or later) RAM (memory) 2.0 GB or more of RAM (4.0 GB or more recommended) Hard disk drive Installation: Min. 300 MB of available space Operation: Min.
Introduction/ Contents Supported Images Image data Image type RAW Images in the Canon RAW format images shot on supported cameras* Still photos Extension .CR3 .CR2 .TIF .CRW JPEG Exif 2.2, 2.21 or 2.3-compatible JPEG .JPG/.JPEG images images TIFF Exif-compatible TIFF images images .TIF/.TIFF .MOV .MP4 * Compatible with RAW images shot with EOS D6000 or EOS D2000 that have been converted to RAW images using the CR2 Converter and have the “.CR2” extension.
Contents Introduction/ Contents Introduction ................................................................ 2 Main Features of DPP .................................................. 2 System Requirements .................................................. 3 Supported Cameras...................................................... 3 Supported Images ........................................................ 4 1 Downloading Images .............................................. 9 Starting up DPP ...............
Introduction/ Contents Tuning White Balance .............................. 52 Adjusting Contrast ................................................. 53 Advanced Adjusting Brightness of Shadows/ Highlights ............................................................... 53 Changing Color Tone and Color Saturation........... 54 Advanced Adjusting Dynamic Range ........................ 55 Adjusting Gradation and Luminance Automatically .........................................................
Introduction/ Contents Editing Efficiently ...................................... 99 Editing in the Edit Image Window .......................... 99 Changing the Thumbnail Display Position to Horizontal............................................................. 100 Gathering and Editing Images in the Collection Window ................................................................ 101 JPEG/TIFF Compositing Images ............................... 103 Compositing Methods ....................................
Introduction/ Contents About This Instruction Manual ............................. 162 Trademarks.......................................................... 162 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Remote Shooting Playing Back Movies and Saving Still Photos HDR PQ Mode * Sections with JPEG/TIFF and JPEG/TIFF in “4 Editing Images” support not only RAW image editing but also JPEG/TIFF image editing.
1 Downloading Images Introduction/ Contents Starting up DPP....................................................... 10 Downloading Images to Your Computer.................. 11 Downloading Images Using the Software “EOS Utility”....... 11 Downloading Images Using Your Card Reader..........
Starting up DPP Introduction/ Contents Double-click the desktop icon. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Double-click DPP starts up and the main window (thumbnail layout) appears.
Downloading Images to Your Computer Download the images saved on the memory card inserted in the camera. Downloading Images Using the Software “EOS Utility” You can download images with “EOS Utility”, communication software for the camera. For detailed instructions on downloading images, refer to the “EOS Utility Instruction Manual” (PDF electronic manual). Downloading Images Using Your Card Reader You can also download images to the computer using a third-party card reader.
2 Viewing Images Introduction/ Contents Viewing Images in the Main Window (Thumbnail Layout) ........... 13 Changing the Thumbnail Display................................ 14 Advanced Using the Thumbnails Control Panel ........ 15 Using the Thumbnail Display Filter/Sort Function.................................................................. 16 Advanced Displaying the Histogram Palette .............. 17 Advanced Enlarging and Viewing an Image in the Preview Window ............
Viewing Images in the Main Window (Thumbnail Layout) Introduction/ Contents Images downloaded to your computer are displayed as a thumbnails list in the main window (thumbnail layout). You can double-click an image to open the preview window (p.18) and display the image at large size. Downloading Images Main window Toolbar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Forward/Reverse Check marks (p.33, p.
Introduction/ Contents Changing the Thumbnail Display You can change the size of the thumbnail images displayed in the main window and select the information displayed for thumbnails. Select the [Thumbnails] menu desired item. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images The display changes to the selected item.
Introduction/ Contents Advanced Using the Thumbnails Control Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images The thumbnails control panel integrates various settings for viewing thumbnails. By using this panel, you can view and specify the settings for thumbnails efficiently.
Introduction/ Contents Advanced Using the Thumbnail Display Filter/Sort Function This function allows you to display only thumbnails that match the selected filtering option or to specify an option for sorting thumbnails. the [Filter] button on the [Filter/Sort pane] in the 1 Set main window to [ON]. (3) Sorting options Select an option for sorting thumbnails. If files were added, a “*” is temporarily displayed after the option name. [Custom] is displayed if you sorted thumbnails in a chosen way.
Introduction/ Contents Advanced Displaying the Histogram Palette The histogram palette shows a histogram of the selected image. You can quickly check a histogram without opening a tool palette. Select the [View] menu [Histogram palette]. The histogram palette appears. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images You can select any of the following four histograms from the menu that appears when you right-click with the mouse.
Enlarging and Viewing an Image in the Preview Window Introduction/ Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Double-click Viewing Images Sorting Images The preview window appears. Up to 36 windows can be displayed at the same time for the preview window. ( 32bit On 32-bit OSs, up to 4 windows can be displayed at the same time.
Introduction/ Contents Enlarging and Viewing a Specific Area Click the area you want to enlarge. Advanced Displaying the Navigator Palette The navigator palette shows the enlargement area of a selected image. Select the [View] menu [Navigator palette]. The navigator palette appears. Click 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images The area you clicked is enlarged to 100% (actual pixel size). Click again to revert to the full view.
Advanced Checking the Image in Detail Introduction/ Contents Displaying the Main Window (Multi-layout) Click a change layout button at the bottom of the main window (thumbnail layout). The main window (multi-layout) appears. In the main window (multi-layout), you can select from two layouts, with horizontal thumbnails or vertical thumbnails. Click the area you want to enlarge in the image displayed in the preview display area to display the image at actual pixel size (100%).
Introduction/ Contents Checking an Image Using the Preview Control Panel With Preview control panel, you can check the image in detail. You can use this panel in the main window (multi-layout) and edit image window. If the preview control panel is not displayed, you can display it by selecting [Preview control panel] from the [Preview] menu. By default, the [ ] button and [ ] button are selected. When you select a movie, the displayed content changes.
Introduction/ Contents Displaying Multiple Images at the Same Time Displaying AF Points 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Select multiple images, and click the [ ] button. The selected image is displayed. You can display up to 8 images. 1 Click the [ ] button beside the [ ] button, and select the item to display on the image on the menu that appears. Select [Show only AF points in focus] or [Show all AF points]. 32bit On 32-bit OSs, this function is not available.
Introduction/ Contents Displaying Areas Beyond the Set Range with Warning Indicators (Highlight/Shadow Warning) You can set up warning indicators for both highlighted and shadowed parts, which is effective for checking the clipped highlights and shadows and preventing excessive adjustment of an image. Where the area on the image has exceeded the set range, you can display the highlighted part in red and the shadowed part in blue. 2 Select an image and click the [ ] button.
Introduction/ Contents Comparing Pre- and Post-Editing Images (before/after comparison) Arrange vertically/ horizontally (two-screen display) / Split vertically/horizontally (split-image display) You can display before and after versions of an adjusted image in the same window and check the adjustment results. This function allows you to adjust an image while comparing the original image and image being edited.
Introduction/ Contents 1 Select [Display settings for preview properties] from the [Properties to display] pulldown menu. 2 Specify display items with the [Add >>] button and [<< Remove] button. Items that can be selected appear in the list box at left, and actually displayed items appear in the list box at right. You can also change the display order with the [Move Up] button and [Move Down] button. After specifying settings, click the [OK] button.
Introduction/ Contents Checking an Image in Second Windows Second windows are preview windows that you can open additionally for thumbnails and image previews. You can display up to 4 second windows for an single image to check the focus in all parts of the image, etc. Select an image, and then select [Show second screen] from the menu that appears when you rightclick with the mouse.
Opening and Closing Window Panels (Panes) Introduction/ Contents Panels (panes) at the top, bottom, left, and right of each window can be closed to suit the tasks being performed. You can use DPP in an optimal layout. Downloading Images Click the [ ] for a panel to open or close.
Changing the Display Method and Order of Palettes Introduction/ Contents For any palette (tool palette, navigator palette, histogram palette, quick check palette, and camera control palette), you can change how the palette is displayed (docked/floating), or the display order of multiple docked palettes. Downloading Images Changing the Display Method (Dock/Float) of Palettes Right-click on the palette’s title bar (where its name is shown) and click [Dock/float] in the dialog that appears.
Exiting DPP Introduction/ Contents In the main window, select the [File] menu [Exit]. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images DPP exits. Remote Shooting Playing Back Movies and Saving Still Photos HDR PQ Mode Specifying Preferences A confirmation dialog box for saving the images appears when you try to exit DPP without saving the adjusted image.
3 Organizing and Sorting Images Efficiently Checking/Sorting Images ........................ 31 Sorting Images ........................................................... 33 Attaching Check Marks........................................... 33 Setting Ratings ....................................................... 33 Sorting Images in the Main Window ........................... 34 Attaching Check Marks in the Main Window .......... 34 Setting Ratings in the Main Window.......................
Efficiently Checking/Sorting Images You can enlarge images displayed as thumbnails in the main window and efficiently check each image. You can sort images into groups. Note that this function does not apply to movie files. Introduction/ Contents the [ ] or [ ] button to switch between 3 Click images to be checked. Quick check window 1 Select multiple images to check in the main window. 2 Display the quick check window.
Introduction/ Contents 4 Click the area you want to enlarge. Convenient functions of the quick check window Click The area you clicked is displayed at 100% (actual pixel size). To change the display position, drag on the image. If you click the [ ] button, you can display the image at 50%. Click again to revert to the full view. To exit, click the [ ] button.
Introduction/ Contents Setting Ratings Sorting Images You can sort images by attaching check marks or setting ratings (indicated with [ ] marks) for each subject or theme. Display the image you want to rate, and then click any one of the [ ]. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Attaching Check Marks Display the image you want to attach a check mark to, and then click any one of [ ] to [ ].
Introduction/ Contents Setting Ratings in the Main Window Sorting Images in the Main Window You can also sort images in the main window by attaching check marks or setting ratings (indicated with [ ] marks) for each subject or theme. Select the images you want to rate, and then click any of the [ ]. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Attaching Check Marks in the Main Window Select the images you want to attach a check mark to, and then click any of [ ] to [ ].
Introduction/ Contents To select multiple images in the main window 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Click on desired images while holding down the key. To select multiple consecutive images, click on the first image, and then click on the last image while holding down the key. Viewing Images Sorting Images The [Label] menu can also be used to attach check marks and set ratings.
Introduction/ Contents Arranging Images in the Main Window You can arrange images in the order of the types of check marks you have attached to images, or in the order of date and time at which the images were shot. You can also freely arrange images by moving them individually. Arranging Freely Drag and drop the image to the desired location. Viewing Images Arranging by Type Sorting Images Select the [Thumbnails] menu [Sort] desired item.
Introduction/ Contents Displaying a RAW Image and JPEG Image as a Single Image You can display and handle a RAW image and JPEG image shot simultaneously as a single image. In particular, you can halve the number of images displayed in the main window and you can streamline the checking of a large number of images shot simultaneously.
Checking Image Information Select the image for which you want to check the image information. 1 2 Select the [View] menu [Info]. 3 Select a tab sheet and check information. The image information window appears.
Organizing Images This section explains how to delete unwanted images, move or copy images, etc., to organize your images. Deleting an Unwanted Image Be aware that you cannot recover deleted images. Select an unwanted image in the main window. 1 2 Select the [File] menu [Move to Recycle Bin]. Introduction/ Contents Moving Images You can move or copy images to a separate folder and sort by shooting date or themes. Drag the image to be moved or copied.
Introduction/ Contents Moving Images in Folders You can move or copy folders that contain images, and sort the images by folders. Drag the folder to be moved or copied. To move: Drag the folder and release when the folder is in the destination folder. To copy: Drag the folder while holding down the key and release when the folder is in the destination folder. Registering Frequent-Use Folders (Bookmark Registration) You can register frequently used folders in bookmarks.
4 Editing Images Introduction/ Contents RAW Images ............................................................ 43 RAW Images.............................................................. 43 RAW Development .................................................... 43 When RAW Development is to be Done.................... 43 Advantages of a RAW Image .................................... 43 Editing JPEG and TIFF Images ............................... 44 Tool Palettes ............................................
Introduction/ Contents Using the Digital Lens Optimizer ............................... 77 Adjusting Image Sharpness....................................... 79 Editing with the Partial Adjustment Tool Palette .............................................................. 80 JPEG/TIFF Advanced Making Partial Adjustments to Images ([Brightness], [Contrast], [Hue], [Saturation]) ................................... 80 Making Partial Adjustments to Images ([Reduce color moiré])................................
RAW Images RAW Images A RAW image is image data that has recorded output data of imaging sensor. As image processing is not performed inside the camera when a photo is taken and the photo has been recorded in the special form of “RAW image data + Image processing conditions information at the time of shooting”, special software is needed to view or edit the image. * “RAW” means “in a natural condition” or “not processed or refined”.
Editing JPEG and TIFF Images With DPP, you can adjust JPEG and TIFF images in the same way as RAW images using the tool palettes below.
Tool Palettes Introduction/ Contents With DPP, you can adjust images with the tool palettes by switching between various tool palette windows according to your editing requirements. Since adjustments made with the tool palettes only change the image processing conditions, the “original image data itself” remains unaffected. As there is no image deterioration that normally accompanies editing, you can readjust your image any number of times.
Introduction/ Contents Using the different tool palettes We recommend that you use the Basic Adjustment tool palette to make adjustments to RAW images. However, if you find that the Basic Adjustment tool palette does not offer a sufficient range of adjustments, or if you want to use specific functions that are only available in the Tone Adjustment tool palette (p.
JPEG/TIFF Editing with the Basic Adjustment Tool Palette The Basic Adjustment tool palette makes basic adjustments to RAW images. With this tool palette, you can adjust the image brightness, set Picture Style, adjust the white balance, adjust the contrast, adjust the color tone and saturation, adjust the dynamic range, apply the Auto Lighting Optimizer and adjust the image sharpness.
Introduction/ Contents Picture Style Changing the Picture Style If the image looks different from what you visualized at the time of shooting, you can get it closer to what you expected by changing the Picture Style. Even if you have saved the image (p.92) with [Monochrome] (p.54) selected, you can still change to another Picture Style at any point by simply selecting a Picture Style other than [Monochrome].
Introduction/ Contents Picture Style Description [Picture Style file The name of the Picture Style file applied in DPP is applied in DPP] displayed in [ ]. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Displayed when selecting an image shot with the (Picture Style file Picture Style file registered in the camera. registered in the In the list, the name of the Picture Style file is camera) displayed in ( ).
Introduction/ Contents Advanced Using a Picture Style File A Picture Style file is a Picture Style extension file. With DPP, you can apply to RAW images Picture Style files that you have downloaded from Canon Web site effective for various scenes or Picture Style files created with “Picture Style Editor”. When using a Picture Style file, save it to your computer beforehand.
Introduction/ Contents Adjusting Color Tone Using Click White Balance You can adjust white balance using a selected part of an image as the standard for white to make the image appear natural. Using click white balance is effective when using it in parts of an image where white color tone has changed under the influence of a light source. The color of the image is adjusted with the point you selected as the standard for white.
Introduction/ Contents Advanced Advanced Adjusting White Balance with Color Temperature Tuning White Balance White balance can be adjusted by setting a numerical value for color temperature. [Color temperature] from the [White balance 1 Select adjustment] list box. 2 Set the color temperature. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images This is a function that makes fine adjustments to the white balance.
Introduction/ Contents Adjusting Contrast Advanced Modulation and degree of contrast can be adjusted. Move the slider to the right to make contrast stronger and to the left to make contrast weaker. Adjusting Brightness of Shadows/Highlights You can adjust the brightness of shadows and highlights in an image. By adjusting only shadows or highlights in an image, you can reduce the effects of clipping in shadows and highlights.
Introduction/ Contents Changing Color Tone and Color Saturation Tone and overall color saturation can be adjusted. If Picture Style (p.48) is set to [Monochrome], [Color tone] and [Color saturation] switch to [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] (this page). Reverts the image to the original settings Adjusting Monochrome When the Picture Style (p.48) is set to [Monochrome], you can create monochrome photographs with effects similar to filtering, or with a look of monotone color photograph.
Introduction/ Contents Filter effect: Creates a monochrome photograph where the white of clouds and the green of trees are emphasized. Filter Example of effect None General monochrome image without filter effect. Yellow Blue sky is reproduced more naturally and white clouds emerge clearly. Orange Blue sky becomes somewhat darker. The brightness of the setting sun increases further. Red Blue sky becomes quite dark. Autumn leaves become clear and bright.
Introduction/ Contents [Linear] - A function for advanced adjustment Use [Linear] when you adjust images using image editing software that has advanced editing functions. Note that when [Linear] is checkmarked, the image becomes dim. [Contrast], [Highlight], [Shadow], and [Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.57) will not function when [Linear] is checkmarked.
Introduction/ Contents Using the Auto Lighting Optimizer 1 Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Checkmark the [Auto Lighting Optimizer] checkbox. Checkmark Printing Images For the image shot with the camera’s Auto Lighting Optimizer function, the checkbox is already checked. Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images 2 Change the setting according to your preferences. Select from three levels: Low/Standard/ Strong Auto correction is applied to the image to match the setting.
Introduction/ Contents Adjusting Image Sharpness You can make the overall atmosphere of an image sharper or softer. Adjustment can be made by selecting from two modes, [Sharpness] and [Unsharp mask]. Select [Sharpness] from the list box and adjust the setting. Reverts the image to the original settings [Sharpness]: Controls the sharpness of an image by adjusting the level of emphasis for the outline of the image.
Introduction/ Contents Detailed Setting of Image Sharpness Select [Unsharp mask] from the list box and adjust the setting. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Remote Shooting Select [Unsharp mask] Enter a setting (in 0.
JPEG/TIFF Editing with the Tone Adjustment Tool Palette With the Tone Adjustment tool palette, you can adjust images with the same functions as general image editing software. Select an image in the main window, etc. 1 2 Display the Tone Adjustment tool palette. Introduction/ Contents Adjusting Brightness and Contrast The brightness and contrast of an image can be adjusted.
Introduction/ Contents Brightness: Move the slider to the right to make an image brighter and to the left to make an image darker. Contrast: Used to adjust modulation and degree of contrast of color. Move the slider to the right to make contrast of an image stronger and to the left to make contrast weaker. Adjusting Color Tone Using Click White Balance You can adjust white balance using a selected part of an image as the standard for white to make the image appear natural.
Introduction/ Contents 2 Click on a point that is to be the standard for white. Advanced Adjusting Tone Curve You can adjust the brightness, contrast and color of a specific area by changing the tone curve (p.156). the tone curve mode and interpolation 1 Select method.
Introduction/ Contents Example of a Tone Curve Operation 2 Make adjustments.
Introduction/ Contents Advanced Adjusting Dynamic Range Dynamic range (width of gradation expression) from dark points to bright points in an image can be adjusted. Move downwards Output white points The setting range of black points is 0 to 247 (in 1-stop increments when entering a value). The setting range of white points is 8 to 255 (in 1-stop increments when entering a value). You can display pre- and post-editing histograms (p.63).
JPEG/TIFF Editing with the Color Adjustment Tool Palette Introduction/ Contents With the Color Adjustment tool palette, you can adjust the hue, saturation and luminance in a specific color gamut for 8 color gamuts (red, orange, yellow, green, aqua, blue, purple and magenta). You can also adjust the hue and saturation for the entire image and tune monochrome images. Downloading Images 1 Select an image in the main window, etc. 2 Display the Color Adjustment tool palette.
Introduction/ Contents Adjusting Hue and Saturation for an Entire Image Use the sliders to make adjustments. You can also make adjustments by directly entering a numeric value. Hue: Move the slider to the right to make color tones more yellowish, and to the left to make color tones more reddish. Saturation:Adjusts the overall color intensity for the image. Move the slider to the right for more intense colors, and to the left for less intense colors.
JPEG/TIFF Editing with the Detailed Adjustment Tool Palette Introduction/ Contents You can use the Detailed Adjustment tool palette to reduce the noise that occurs in images shot at night or at high ISO settings. This tool palette can also be used in conjunction with the sharpness adjustment functions. Note that you can use the functions in this tool palette with JPEG and TIFF images as well as RAW images. Downloading Images 1 Select an image in the main window, etc.
Introduction/ Contents Setting the same noise reduction level for several images You can set the same noise reduction level for several images by first selecting multiple images in the main window, and then adjusting the noise reduction level using the [Reduce luminance noise] and [Reduce chrominance noise] sliders. If [Reduce luminance noise] is set, resolution may be reduced along with reduction of noise. If [Reduce chrominance noise] is set, color bleeding may occur along with reduction of noise.
JPEG/TIFF Editing with the Trimming/Angle Adjustment Tool Palette Introduction/ Contents You can crop only the part of an image you need, or change the composition of an image where an image shot horizontally becomes vertical. You can also adjust the angle of an image before cropping. Downloading Images 1 Select the image to be cropped. 2 Display the Trimming/Angle Adjustment tool palette.
Introduction/ Contents List of aspect ratios (width : height) [Free]: You can crop an image to any size, regardless of the selectable ratio. [Custom]: You can crop an image at the specified ratio. 5 Return to the main window. The trimming range frame is displayed in the cropped image (p.155). When the cropped image is displayed in a preview window or the edit image window, it is displayed in its cropped form.
Introduction/ Contents * When shooting with EOS 5DS/EOS 5DS R, EOS 5D Mark IV, EOS 5D Mark III, EOS R (with any setting other than [1.6x (crop)]), or EOS 7D Mark II and [Add cropping information] is set in Custom Functions, aspect ratio information is only set and the image is not actually cropped, even for JPEG images. Operate using the menu Each operation can also be performed with the menu which appears when you right-click with the mouse on the image.
Editing with the Lens Correction Tool Palette With the Lens Correction tool palette, you can use the lens aberration correction functions and the Digital Lens Optimizer to correct lens aberration in your images and to improve their resolution. This tool palette can also be used in conjunction with the sharpness adjustment functions. Note that the lens aberration correction functions and the Digital Lens Optimizer can only be used with RAW images. 1 Select an image in the main window, etc.
Introduction/ Contents Making Corrections You can make corrections to any of the five aberrations as below, either one at a time or simultaneously. Peripheral illumination Chromatic aberration (color fringing which occurs in the periphery of an image) Color blur (blue or red color blur which sometimes occurs at the edge of the highlighted area of an image) Distortions Diffraction Select an image in the main window.
Introduction/ Contents Effects of Distortion Correction for Fisheye Lenses Shot settings By selecting this option, only the aberration corrections will be performed to correct the optical distortions. Emphasize Distance This converts the image to an “equidistant projection” style image. This projection method preserves distance relationships. Equidistant projection displays a distance in the same distance anywhere from the center to the periphery.
Introduction/ Contents Emphasize Center This converts the image to an “orthographic projection” style image. With this projection method, the center is more emphasized. Since an orthogonal projection allows a subject of the same brightness to be displayed as occupying the same area in the image, this method has typical uses in photography for celestial luminance distributions and center-emphasized animal photography.
Introduction/ Contents Correcting Multiple Images at a Time You can apply the same corrections to several images by first selecting multiple images in the main window, and then performing correction procedures (p.73). Also, you can apply same corrections by copying the recipe of the corrected image and pasting it onto the multiple images (p.96).
Introduction/ Contents Using the Digital Lens Optimizer 2 Click the [ ] button. the status of [Lens data] for [Digital Lens 1 Check Optimizer]. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images The [Add or Remove lens data] window appears. Sorting Images Editing Images [Not Available] is displayed for an image shot with a noncompatible camera or lens, or for a non-compatible image such as a JPEG, TIFF, S-RAW, or M-RAW image. The function cannot be used for these images.
Introduction/ Contents the checkbox for the lens used to shoot 3 Checkmark the image, and click the [Start] button. the [Digital Lens Optimizer] checkbox 4 Checkmark and adjust the image. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Reverts to its condition before adjustment The lens data is downloaded to your computer.
Introduction/ Contents Use the slider to adjust the Digital Lens Optimizer effect. If no shooting distance information is saved to the image, the shooting distance slider is set automatically to the right end at infinity position and a [] appears above the shooting distance slider. If the lens requires no adjustment with the [Shooting distance information] slider, the slider cannot be used.
JPEG/TIFF Advanced Editing with the Partial Adjustment Tool Palette The Partial Adjustment tool palette adjusts the selected area of an image. With this tool palette, you can adjust brightness, contrast, hue, and saturation, and reduce color moiré. Supported image formats are CR2, CR3, TIFF, and JPG. 3 Select [Adjustment group]. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images 32bit On 32-bit OSs, this function is not available.
Introduction/ Contents or drag the circular cursor on the image to 6 Click select the area of adjustment in the image. the sliders to adjust [Adjustment items] as 7 Use necessary. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Circular cursor the sliders to adjust [Size] and [Blur radius] for 5 Drag the circular cursor. Adjustments are applied to the area selected in step 6.
Introduction/ Contents Making Partial Adjustments to Images ([Reduce color moiré]) This function partially reduces color moiré in images. Before making adjustments, see “Reducing Color Moiré in an Image” (p.68) for information on reducing color moiré. Select an image in the main window, etc. 1 2 Display the Partial Adjustment tool palette. the [Reduce color moiré] button in [Adjustment 3 Click group]. A dialog box for [Reduce color moiré] appears.
Introduction/ Contents Adjustment Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images The Partial Adjustment tool palette comprises 5 adjustment groups that allow adjustments to be made with [Brightness], [Contrast], [Hue], and [Saturation] options, and 1 adjustment group that allows adjustments to be made with the [Reduce color moiré] option. • A different adjustment area can be selected for each adjustment group.
JPEG/TIFF Editing with the Dust Delete/Copy Stamp Tool Palette Introduction/ Contents You can use this tool palette to erase dust and other marks in a shot image and to correct an image by copying part of the image and pasting it onto an unnecessary part of the image. Note that you can use the functions in this tool palette with JPEG and TIFF images as well as RAW images.
Introduction/ Contents Additional information The dust-erased image can be reverted to its original condition at any time A dust-erased image is displayed or printed as a dust-erased image. However, since the dust on the image is not actually erased, you can always revert to the original image by clicking the [ ] button in the Dust Delete/Copy Stamp tool palette or performing the “Re-Editing an Image” procedure (p.94).
Introduction/ Contents Manually Erasing Dust (Repair Function) You can erase dust spots in an image by selecting them one by one. the dust spot to be erased within the [ 5 Place click. ] and window, select the image from which you 1 Inwantthetomain erase dust spots. 2 Display the Dust Delete/Copy Stamp tool palette. 3 Click the point from where dust is to be erased. Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Click Click The display changes to 100% view.
Introduction/ Contents Additional information Click several times when dust spots are not erased completely Where unwanted dust spots are not erased even after performing step 5 once, they may be erased completely when you click several times. Mainly spots of dust can be erased with the repair function Spots of dust can be erased with the repair function. You may be unable to erase lines of dust. In this case, use the copy stamp function (p.88).
Introduction/ Contents Erasing Unwanted Parts of an Image (Copy Stamp Function) You can correct an image by pasting a section copied from another part of the image to an unwanted part of the image. Follow steps 1 to 3 in “Manually Erasing Dust (Repair Function)” (p.86). 1 2 Specify the section to be copied. Click on the section that is to be the copy source after clicking the [Select Copy Source] button. To change the section that is to be the copy source, perform the operation above again.
Setting Work Color Space A different work color space (p.149) from the default settings (p.157) can be set for each image. Display the Settings tool palette select the color space to be set.
Using the Soft-Proof Colors Function By using the soft-proof colors function, you can apply a selected printing profile or CMYK simulation profile to the displayed image. The reliability of the soft-proof colors function depends on the monitor quality, the monitor and printer profiles, and surrounding lighting conditions where you are working.
Specifying the Size when Opening RAW Images This applies only to RAW images with the extension “.CR3” that were shot with [ ] selected on the camera. This function specifies the image size when a RAW image is selected and opened in DPP. When the selected RAW image is converted and saved as a JPEG or TIFF image, it is also saved at the same size. This function is not available for images shot with the Dual Pixel RAW function set on the camera.
JPEG/TIFF Saving Editing Results Saving Editing Contents to an Image All the contents adjusted with the tool palette (recipe) can be saved to the image or saved as a separate image. Select the [File] menu desired item. Introduction/ Contents Saving as a separate image To view, edit and print a RAW image with software other than DPP, convert to a more versatile JPEG or TIFF image and save.
Introduction/ Contents the necessary settings, and then click the 3 Specify [Save] button. Viewing Images Sorting Images Select the save destination Editing Images Click and save Enter a file name and select an image type Printing Images To save the developing/editing results for the version you are currently using The RAW image is converted to a JPEG or TIFF image which is then saved as a new image in the specified save destination.
JPEG/TIFF Re-Editing an Image Only the image processing conditions are changed in images adjusted with the tool palette (p.44 to p.89), so the “original image data itself” remains unaffected. (The trimming range or dust-erasure information of a cropped image (p.69) or dust-erased image (p.84 to p.88) is simply saved to the image.) For this reason, you can undo any adjustments saved (p.
JPEG/TIFF Utilizing Adjustment Contents (Recipe) All the adjustment contents (recipe) made using the tool palette can be saved as an individual recipe file (extension “.dr4”) and loaded and applied to another image. You can edit images efficiently by selecting and adjusting one image from images shot with the same shooting environment and batch applying the adjustment results to a large number of images.
Introduction/ Contents Copying a Recipe and Applying to Another Image You can copy a recipe of an edited image and then apply it to another image. Select the image with the recipe you want to copy. 1 To copy all items of a recipe, select the [Edit] menu 2 [Copy recipe]. To copy only selected items of a recipe, select the [Edit] menu [Copy selected recipe]. The recipe is copied.
Introduction/ Contents Loading and Applying Recipes 1 Select the image to which a recipe is to be applied, and then select the [Edit] menu [Read and paste recipe from file]. The [Open] dialog box appears. 2 Select a recipe and click the [Open] button. The recipe is applied to the image.
JPEG/TIFF Adjusting by Comparing Multiple Images You can synchronize the areas in different images to be displayed among multiple preview windows, and adjust images while comparing them. preview window, display the multiple images 1 Into the be compared. 2 Align the images. 5 Move the area to be displayed. If you move the enlargement display area in one of the preview windows, the enlargement display area will also change in all other preview windows.
JPEG/TIFF Editing Efficiently Editing in the Edit Image Window The thumbnail display and the preview window are combined, and images can be edited efficiently while quickly switching between images to be edited. Select the images to be edited beforehand in the main window. Introduction/ Contents 3 Edit the image. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images 1 Inedit.the main window, select the images you want to 2 Switch to the edit image window.
Introduction/ Contents 4 Click the area you want to enlarge. Changing the Thumbnail Display Position to Horizontal Select the [View] menu [Horizontal Thumbnails]. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Click Editing Images Printing Images The area you clicked is enlarged to 100% (actual pixel size). To change the display area, drag on the image or drag the enlargement display area (p.19) of the navigator palette.
Introduction/ Contents Gathering and Editing Images in the Collection Window You can gather selected images together in Collection folders for viewing, comparison and editing. You can gather images from several folders as well as from a single folder, allowing you to work with them efficiently. [+ Add collection] in the [Collection] area in the 1 Click main window. images or image folders in the main window. 3 Select Select the [File] menu [Add to collection].
Introduction/ Contents 5 Check the displayed images. 6 Edit the images. Edit the displayed images. Displayed images are retained in the collection folders even after exiting DPP. To remove images from collection folders Removing selected images Select images in a collection folder, select images, and select [Remove from collection] in the [File] menu.
JPEG/TIFF Compositing Images You can combine two images into a single image. You can further combine images by adding another image to the composited image. Since the composited image is saved as a separate image, the original images remain as they are. 32bit On 32-bit OSs, this function is not available. This function can be used with all image types (p.4) supported by DPP. The color space of a composited image will be the color space of the background image.
Introduction/ Contents 3 Select the image to combine. Select the image to combine from the [Foreground Image] list box. 4 Select a compositing method. Select a compositing method from the [Composite Method] list box. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images The selected image is displayed in the [Foreground Image] thumbnail display.
Introduction/ Contents 5 Position the images. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Shift large amount (50 pixels) Shift small amount (1 pixel) Align image centers You can also directly enter the position coordinates of the [Foreground Image] to align it. Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Remote Shooting Playing Back Movies and Saving Still Photos By default, the background image and the [Foreground Image] are displayed with their centers aligned.
Introduction/ Contents 6 Click the [Save As] button. Specify the required settings in the window that appears and then click the [Save] button. By clicking the [Continue] button, images are combined to create a new background image, and you can continue by combining another image. To finish, click the [Close] button. Compositing Methods Add The background image and [Foreground Image] are added and images are combined.
JPEG/TIFF Creating HDR (High Dynamic Range) Images You can create images with a wide dynamic range where clipping in highlights and shadows has been reduced, and images that appear like paintings. This is suited for scenes such as still-lifes and landscapes. This function is most effective when using three images with different exposures for the same scene (negative exposure, standard exposure, positive exposure) to create an HDR image.
Introduction/ Contents 4 Make required selections to adjust the image. Sliders in [Adjust Image] window [Tone/Color] [Brightness]: Adjusts the overall brightness of the image. Move the slider to the right to brighten the image, and to the left to darken the image. [Saturation]: Adjusts the overall color saturation of the image. Move the slider to the right to make the color deeper, and to the left to make the color weaker. [Contrast]: Adjusts the overall contrast of the image.
Introduction/ Contents 5 Click the [Save As] button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Specify the required settings in the window that appears by clicking the [Save As] button and click the [Save] button. Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Remote Shooting Playing Back Movies and Saving Still Photos HDR PQ Mode Specifying Preferences You can display this function as a function button in the main window’s toolbar (p.115).
Advanced Using the Dual Pixel RAW Optimizer By setting the Dual Pixel RAW function on the camera compatible with the function before shooting RAW images, images are recorded as “special RAW images (Dual Pixel RAW images)” with dual pixel information appended from the imaging sensor. This is called Dual Pixel RAW shooting.
Introduction/ Contents 3 Adjust the image. Reposition the Viewpoint or Foreground Bokeh for a More Pleasing Result Reposition the viewpoint or foreground bokeh for a more pleasing result, using the dual pixel information recorded in Dual Pixel RAW images. main window or edit image window, select the 1 InDualthePixel RAW image you want to adjust, and then select [Start Dual Pixel RAW Optimizer] from the [Tools] menu. The Dual Pixel RAW Optimizer window appears.
Introduction/ Contents 4 Adjust the image. Reduces the Appearance of Ghosting in Images Reduce the appearance of ghosting in images, using the dual pixel information in Dual Pixel RAW images. 1 In the main window or edit image window, select the Dual Pixel RAW image you want to adjust, and then select [Start Dual Pixel RAW Optimizer] from the [Tools] menu. The Dual Pixel RAW Optimizer window appears. 2 Checkmark the [Ghosting Reduction] checkbox, and specify the area.
Introduction/ Contents 3 Click the [OK] button. Adjustment results are applied to the image. For information on saving adjustment results to images, see “Saving Editing Results” (p.92).
Advanced Transferring a RAW Image to Photoshop A RAW image can be converted to a TIFF image (16bit) and transferred to Adobe Photoshop. Select the [Tools] menu [Transfer to Photoshop]. Photoshop starts up and the transferred image is displayed. A single image can be transferred at a time Only one image can be transferred at a time. To send multiple images at a time, see p.126.
Advanced Customizing the Main Window Toolbar Introduction/ Contents You can display buttons for frequently-used functions in the main window’s toolbar. You can also change how the buttons are laid out. Downloading Images 1 Select the [Tools] menu [Customize toolbar]. 2 Select functions to display in the toolbar. The [Configure Toolbar] window appears.
5 Printing Images Introduction/ Contents Printing an Image .................................................. 117 Printing with Shooting Information......................... 118 Printing a Thumbnail List (Contact Sheet Printing) ................................................................. 119 Plug-in printing.......................................................
Printing an Image You can print images with a printer. As an example, the procedure to print one image on one sheet of paper is described here. Select the image to be printed. 1 2 Select the [File] menu [Print]. Introduction/ Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Remote Shooting Playing Back Movies and Saving Still Photos The printer’s print settings dialog box appears. 3 Print.
Printing with Shooting Information You can freely layout one image on one sheet of paper and print together with titles and shooting information, etc. Select one image to be printed. 1 2 Select the [File] menu [Print with detailed setting]. the required settings for printing, and then 3 Specify click the [Print] button. Introduction/ Contents To maintain the settings The settings of each tab sheet in step 3 are memorized when printing or the [Apply] button is clicked.
Printing a Thumbnail List (Contact Sheet Printing) You can print rows of multiple images on one sheet of paper. Select images to be printed in a thumbnail list. 1 2 Select the [File] menu [Print contact sheets]. the required settings for printing, and then 3 Specify click the [Print] button. Switches the settings tab sheet To maintain the settings The settings of each tab sheet in step 3 are memorized when printing or the [Apply] button is clicked.
Plug-in printing Select the [File] menu [Plug-in printing] Plug-In 1 for the printer you use. The Plug-In starts up. the required settings for printing 2 Specify photographs and then print.
6 Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Batch Apply White Balance to Images (Personal White Balance) ................................................................ 122 Registering Personal White Balance ........................ 122 Applying Personal White Balance ............................ 123 Batch Save as JPEG or TIFF Images (Batch Processing)............................................................ 124 Batch Transfer Images to Image Editing Software .........
Batch Apply White Balance to Images (Personal White Balance) The white balance adjustments made to a RAW image shot in a specific shooting environment can be registered as personal white balance. You can then perform efficient white balance adjustment by applying this personal white balance to a large number of RAW images shot in the same shooting environment. Personal white balance data for versions before DPP 4 cannot be applied.
Introduction/ Contents Applying Personal White Balance In the main window, select the image to which a personal white balance is to be applied. 1 2 Select the [View] menu [Tool palette]. the personal white balance number button that 3 Click is to be applied. The tool palette appears.
Batch Save as JPEG or TIFF Images (Batch Processing) You can batch convert and save edited RAW images to highly versatile JPEG or TIFF images. The images are saved as separate images, so the RAW images remain unaffected. 4 In the processing dialog box, click the [Exit] button. Introduction/ Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images In the main window, select multiple images to be converted. 1 2 Select the [File] menu [Batch process].
Introduction/ Contents Saving images with recipe is not possible In the [Batch settings] window, you cannot perform [Save] or [Save As] (p.92) to edited RAW images. To save the developing/editing results for the version you are currently using DPP’s RAW image development processing technology is continually being improved upon so that you can perform the latest image processing more appropriately.
Batch Transfer Images to Image Editing Software You can transfer multiple images to image editing software. Unlike “Transferring a RAW Image to Photoshop” (p.114), you transfer images that have first been converted and saved as a separate image, so the transferred image will not be deleted after exiting the destination software. The software used here as an example is Adobe Photoshop. 5 Select Photoshop. the main window, select multiple images to be 1 Intransferred.
Batch Change the File Name of Images window, select multiple images of which 1 Inthethefilemain names are to be changed. 2 Select the [Tools] menu [Start Rename tool]. the required settings and click the [Execute] 3 Specify button. The rename window appears. Changing the File Name of Images in the Order in the Main Window When you change the order of the images in the main window, you can change in one operation the names of the files for the images, in the order they were rearranged.
7 Remote Shooting Introduction/ Contents Remote Shooting................................................... 129 Registering Click White Balance in the Camera.......
Remote Shooting You can perform remote shooting by using “EOS Utility” which enables communication with a camera in combination. For remote shooting, “EOS Utility Ver. 3.x” must be installed on your computer. For information on cameras compatible with “EOS Utility Ver. 3.x”, refer to “EOS Utility Ver. 3.x Instruction Manual” (electronic manual in PDF format). This function is not available on EOS M series cameras other than the EOS M50, or PowerShot cameras.
Introduction/ Contents You can change the [File Name] for Specify Remote Shooting Folder window. (If [Do not modify] is selected, images are saved with the file names set on the camera.) Downloading Images 1 Click the [Settings] button to display the Set file name for captured Viewing Images image window. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Sorting Images Editing Images You can perform shooting while checking the image by switching the window to multi-layout.
Introduction/ Contents 5 Specify the required settings. 7 Specify the required settings. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images For detailed instructions on setting procedures, refer to “EOS Utility Instruction Manual” (PDF electronic manual). 6 Click the [Settings] button.
Introduction/ Contents Registering Click White Balance in the Camera During remote shooting, you can register click white balance to the connected camera. To use this function, EOS Utility version 3.4.20 or later must be installed on your computer. This function is not available on EOS M series cameras other than the EOS M50, or PowerShot cameras. 1 Display the shot image to be used as the standard for white balance.
Introduction/ Contents a point that is to be the standard for white 3 Select balance in the shot image, and register the white balance in the camera. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Click the [ ] button, and in the displayed image in step 1, click on a point that is to be the standard for white balance with the mouse. The white balance is registered to the destination selected in step 2, and applied to displayed images.
8 Playing Back Movies and Saving Still Photos Playing Back Movies and Saving Still Photos .......
Playing Back Movies and Saving Still Photos Introduction/ Contents In systems running 64-bit versions of Windows 8.1 or later, you can use DPP to play back MOV or MP4 movies shot using a supported camera and save still photos from the movies as JPEG or TIFF images. To use this function, [Play with Digital Photo Professional 4] must be selected in [Movie file playback] in the [General Settings] tab sheet in [Preferences]. Note that you cannot edit movies in DPP.
Introduction/ Contents 2 Use the preview control panel for each operation. (10) Save as still photo 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images (4) Show playback time (5) Frame position slider (6) Frame no./Total frames Viewing Images Sorting Images (2) Next frame (1) Play/pause (7) Mute/unmute (8) Volume slider (3) Previous frame (9) Viewing LUT on/off Editing Images Printing Images (1) Play/pause Play and pause the selected movie. (7) Mute/unmute Turns audio output on or off.
Introduction/ Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Remote Shooting On some supported cameras, shooting a movie generates a “.THM” file that is saved together with the movie file.The “.THM” file has the same image number as the movie file and records the shooting information. In DPP, the movie file and “.THM” file must be stored in the same folder when the movie is played back.
9 Using HDR PQ Mode Introduction/ Contents HDR PQ Mode....................................................... 139 System Requirements for HDR PQ Mode ............. 139 Displaying Images in HDR PQ Mode .................... 140 Function Restrictions when Using HDR PQ Mode...................................................................... 142 Saving Images Displayed in HDR PQ Mode in JPEG/ TIFF Format...........................................................
HDR PQ Mode System Requirements for HDR PQ Mode HDR stands for High Dynamic Range and refers to technology that enables expression of “a wider range of brightness” than with the conventional range. The conventional range of brightness is referred to as SDR (Standard Dynamic Range) = “standard brightness range” when compared to HDR. The “PQ” in this function’s name, HDR PQ, stands for Perceptual Quantization and refers to the gamma curve of the input signal for displaying HDR images.
Displaying Images in HDR PQ Mode This section explains how to display images where system requirements are as described in “Systems where images are displayed accurately in HDR PQ” on the previous page. Additionally, in Windows, you must specify the HDR option for display settings. 1 Introduction/ Contents an image in the main window, etc., and then 2 Select open the Settings tool palette and select [On] in [HDR PQ].
Introduction/ Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images HDR PQ mode display when an SDR display is connected You can use images in HDR PQ mode also when connected to an SDR display. When an SDR display is connected, the image is displayed according to the characteristics of the SDR display so that the image approximates display in HDR PQ on an HDR display as much as possible.
Function Restrictions when Using HDR PQ Mode Item Quick check window (p.31) Display function Displaying AF points (p.22) Displaying grid lines (p.22) Displayed in SDR according to the characteristics of the display so that images approximate display in HDR PQ as much as possible Not displayable* Not displayable Displaying properties in preview image (p.24) Not displayable* Adjusting the brightness of shadows/highlights (p.53) Basic Adjustment tool palette Restriction Highlight/shadow warning (p.
Introduction/ Contents Switching between HDR and SDR modes clears the following recipes: Basic Adjustment tool palette Auto Lighting Optimizer / contrast / shadow / highlight / color tone / color saturation / filter effect / toning effect / sharpness / linear / Picture Style / gamma adjustment Tone Adjustment tool palette Tone curve adjustment (RGB), brightness, contrast Settings tool palette Work color space, size when opening RAW images Color Adjustment tool palette Hue and saturation adjustments
Saving Images Displayed in HDR PQ Mode in JPEG/TIFF Format You can save the editing results of images displayed in HDR PQ mode in the same way as SDR images. See “Saving Editing Results” (p.92) for information on how to save images. When saving an image displayed in HDR PQ mode as a separate image (JPEG or TIFF image), it is saved as an SDR image. The image is processed so that it approximates display in HDR PQ on an HDR display as much as possible.
10 Specifying Preferences Introduction/ Contents Specifying Preferences.......................................... 146 General Settings....................................................... 146 Image processing ..................................................... 147 Color Management ................................................... 149 View Settings............................................................ 150 Properties Display Settings ......................................
Specifying Preferences You can change the various functions of DPP in the [Preferences] window. Check the contents of each window and set. Refer to the detailed explanations if available, as well as to each window. Introduction/ Contents General Settings You can specify the folder that opens when DPP is started up, saving of recipes, etc. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Viewing Images Select the [Tools] menu [Preferences].
Introduction/ Contents Default value of output resolution When saving JPEG or TIFF images created by converting RAW images (p.92, p.124), the resolution of the JPEG or TIFF images can be set. Temporarily saved files You can delete temporarily saved files that were created and improve operation speed, change file save destinations, or set a limit on disk usage. Any changes you made will be applied when you start up DPP again.
Introduction/ Contents Noise reduction defaults You can set a default beforehand for the noise reduction level. Only RAW images are supported. When [Apply camera settings] is selected, you can pre-set a noise reduction level that suits the camera settings beforehand as the default. When [Set as defaults] is selected, you can pre-set a preferred default setting for the noise reduction level beforehand.
Introduction/ Contents To use this function, a NVIDIA CUDA (Compute Capability 2.0 or higher) GPU* with at least 1.0 GB of video memory is necessary. Additionally, the latest NVIDIA GPU driver must be installed. * GPU is an abbreviation of “Graphics Processing Unit”. The [Use graphics processor for image processing] checkbox is available only when a supporting GPU is installed. If the OS or other application software is using the GPU, processing by the GPU may not be possible in some circumstances.
Introduction/ Contents Changes are not applied to the edited image Even if the default setting is changed, the new default setting is not applied to edited (i.e., adjusted using the tool palette, cropped, dusterased) images. Change the settings individually. View Settings You can set layout for screen display. Viewing Images You can set a color space that is different from the default settings for each image (p.89).
Introduction/ Contents Properties Display Settings You can specify settings for shooting and recipe information that appears with thumbnails and in the preview window. Properties to display You can specify detailed settings for [Display settings for thumbnails with info], [Display settings for thumbnail list], and [Display settings for preview properties]. Items that can be selected appear in the list box at left, and actually displayed items appear in the list box at right.
Reference Introduction/ Contents Troubleshooting..................................................... 153 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Deleting the Software (Uninstalling) ...................... 154 Downloading Images Image Frame Information in the Main Window and Edit Image Window......................................... 155 Viewing Images Glossary ................................................................ 156 Index......................................................................
Troubleshooting If DPP is not operating correctly, refer to the subjects below. Installation can not be completed correctly Select an administrator-level privilege ([Computer administrator], [Administrator], etc.) when setting the user. You cannot install the software if the user setting other than an administrator-level privilege is selected. For detailed information on selecting an administratorlevel privilege, refer to your computer User’s Manual.
Deleting the Software (Uninstalling) Exit any applications before uninstalling the software. Log in under an administrator-level privilege when uninstalling the software. Uninstall the software according to the OS software uninstalling method. To prevent computer malfunctions, always restart your computer after you have uninstalled the software. Re-installing the software without first restarting your computer is particularly likely to result in computer malfunctions.
Image Frame Information in the Main Window and Edit Image Window (p.13, p.99) Trimming (cropping) range*2 (p.69) Check mark (p.33, p.34) Introduction/ Contents 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Downloading Images Pinned image setting mark (p.21) Recipe mark Multiple image display mark (p.22) Viewing Images Sorting Images Editing Images Printing Images Processing Large Numbers of RAW Images Image type*1 Rating mark (p.33, p.34) Digital Lens Optimizer mark (p.
Glossary Introduction/ Contents RAW image bit number EOS DIGITAL camera RAW images are recorded in an uncompressed 14bit or 12bit format. Because RAW images are special images in an undeveloped status, you need software with development processing functions such as DPP in order to view them. The advantage of the undeveloped RAW images is that you can make a variety of adjustments to RAW images with almost no deterioration of the image.
Introduction/ Contents Color space CMYK simulation profiles A color space is the reproducible color range (color gamut characteristics). DPP supports the following five kinds of color space. sRGB : Standard color space for Windows. Widely used for the standard color space of monitors, digital cameras, and scanners. Adobe RGB : A wider color space than sRGB. Mainly used for printing for business purposes. Apple RGB : Standard color space for Macintosh. A slightly wider color space than sRGB.
Index Introduction/ Contents A B Adjust JPEG Images........................................................................... 44 Adjust TIFF Images............................................................................. 44 Adjusting Adjustment Contents (Recipe) ..................................................... 97 Apply Adjustments........................................................................ 96 Automatic Adjustment (Gradation, Luminance)............................ 56 Brightness ....
Introduction/ Contents Color saturation................................................................................... 54 Color Setting of the Monitor (Profiles)............................................... 149 Color Setting of the Printer (Profiles) ................................................ 150 Color Space ...................................................................................... 157 Adobe RGB ................................................................................
Introduction/ Contents H HDR (High Dynamic Range) Images ................................................ 107 HDR PQ Mode .................................................................................. 138 Highlight Area Warning Indicator ........................................................ 23 Histogram Palette ............................................................................... 17 Hue .........................................................................................
Introduction/ Contents Printing with Shooting Information (Detailed Setting Printing).... Printing One Sheet of Paper ............................................................. Printing with Shooting Information (Detailed Setting Printing) .......... Properties Display Settings (Preferences) ........................................ 118 117 118 151 Q Quick Check Window.......................................................................... 31 R Rating.................................................
Introduction/ Contents Transfer an Image to Photoshop ...................................................... 114 Trimming (cropping) range................................................................ 155 Trimming/Angle Adjustment Tool Palette............................................ 69 Trimming/Angle Adjustment Window .................................................. 69 Viewing Images U Unsaved editing content mark .......................................................... 155 Unsharp Mask........
Introduction Picture Style File Creating Software Contents Picture Style Editor Preparing a Sample Ver. 1.21 Instruction Manual Content of this Instruction Manual PSE stands for Picture Style Editor. In this manual, the windows used in the examples are from Windows 7. indicates the selection procedure of the menu. (Example: [File] menu [Exit].) Square brackets are used to indicate items such as menu names, button names and window names that appear on the computer screen.
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING! CANON SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT - READ THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE ON THE CD-ROM IN THIS BOX. BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. This is a license agreement (the [Agreement]) between you and Canon Inc. ([Canon]).
Introduction Picture Style Editor (hereinafter, “PSE”) is software that allows you to edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and save the edited results as original Picture Style files. What is a Picture Style file? A Picture Style file (extension “.PF2” or “.PF3”) is an extended function of a Picture Style.
Contents Introduction ................................................................ 2 System Requirements................................................ 2 Sample Images for Adjustment .................................. 2 Preparing Sample Images.......................................... 4 Starting up PSE.......................................................... 4 Opening a Sample Image .......................................... 4 Basic Windows...........................................................
Preparing Sample Images Opening a Sample Image PSE uses a sample image to perform the various adjustments and save the adjusted results as an original Picture Style file. For this reason, a sample image (p.2) to be used for this purpose needs to be prepared in advance and saved on your computer. The settings performed in PSE are saved as a Picture Style file (p.18) which is separate from the sample image, and the sample image used to perform the adjustments is not affected at all.
Basic Windows Introduction Main Window You can select the display magnification and the display method, etc. of the sample image. Contents Preparing a Sample Basic Windows Image rotation (90 degree increments to the left or right) Pre-adjustments Before and after adjustment comparison display (Top/bottom split) (p.6) Image Characteristics Saving 100% (actual pixel size) view Before and after adjustment comparison display (Left/right split) (p.
Enlarging a Specific Area Adjusting While Comparing with the Original Image You can enlarge a specific area in the main window to 100%. You can display before and after versions of an adjusted image in the same window and perform adjustments while checking the adjustment results. In the main window, double-click the area you want to enlarge. Select [ ] or [ ]. Introduction Contents Preparing a Sample Basic Windows Double-click The images are displayed split top and bottom or left and right.
Setting the Warning Indicators Navigator Window The display position of an image when it is enlarged in the main window and the image histogram can be displayed in the navigator window. You can also set warning indicators to prevent excessive settings being made. Display the [Navigator] window. Select the [View] menu [Navigator]. You can set warning indicators for luminance values (Y) and color values (RGB) which are useful for preventing excessive settings being made.
Introduction Tool Palette You can adjust the image characteristics of the Picture Style file by using the various functions of the [Tool palette]. The adjustments made with the [Tool palette] are immediately applied to the image in the main window, enabling you to check the results as you work. We recommend that you make adjustments in the following order. (1) Adjust with the [Basic] tab sheet (p.10) (2) Adjust with the [Six Color-Axes] tab sheet (p.12) (3) Adjust with the [Specific Colors] tab sheet (p.
Pre-adjusting the Images Sample images used in the adjustment process (p.2) which do not have proper exposure or white balance can be adjusted using the [Preliminary adjustment] window to correct their brightness and white balance. However, please remember that adjustments made with the [Preliminary adjustment] window are merely pre-adjustments for performing adjustments with the [Tool palette] (p.8).
Making Basic Adjustments to Image Characteristics Use the [Basic] tab sheet in the [Tool palette] to make basic adjustments to image characteristics. Select the [Basic] tab in the [Tool palette]. Load a Picture Style file (this page) Save a Picture Style file (p.19) Select a Picture Style to be used as a basis (this page) Selecting a Picture Style to Be Used as a Basis Select the Picture Style used as the basis of the adjustments from the preset Picture Styles except Auto or Monochrome.
Introduction Setting Sharpness, Contrast, Color Saturation and Color Tone Drag each slider. Adjusting the Gamma Characteristic for RGB You can use the tone curve to adjust brightness and contrast under RGB. Use the tone curve in this tab sheet before adjusting with the [Six ColorAxes] tab sheet or [Specific Colors] tab sheet. Adjust the brightness and contrast.
Adjusting Color You can adjust the color region you selected using hue, saturation, and luminosity. 1 2 Select the color region you want to adjust. Introduction Contents Select the [Six Color-Axes] tab in the [Tool palette]. Load a Picture Style file (p.10) Preparing a Sample Save a Picture Style file (p.18) Hue region select buttons (this page) Adjustment color wheel (this page) Basic Windows Select the color region you want to adjust from the adjustment color wheel.
Making Minute Adjustments to Color 4 Adjust color. Drag the sliders to adjust color. You can also directly enter values to adjust. H: Adjust hue. S: Adjust saturation. L: Adjust luminosity. You can make minute adjustments to a color you have specified, using the hue, saturation and luminosity functions in order to get the color you want. You can also set a range for the effect on surrounding colors which occurs when you adjust the colors you have specified.
2 Specify the color you want to adjust. Click the [ ] button and then click the color you want to adjust on the image. 3 Determine the range of effect for the color you want to adjust. Within the frame is the range of effect Introduction Contents Color of the adjustment point selected in step 2 Preparing a Sample Click Basic Windows Range of upper and lower limit of luminosity Drag to move up or down Click The selected color is displayed as an adjustment point [ the color wheel.
4 Adjust the color. 5 Check the range of application. If you checkmark [Show affected area on images], the range of application of the adjusted color blinks on the image. Introduction Contents Preparing a Sample Basic Windows 6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to adjust multiple colors. You can select and adjust colors for up to 100 spots.
Introduction Specifying the Color Directly Displaying the Adjustment Color List and its Functions In addition to specifying the adjustment point by clicking the color on the image (p.14), you can also specify the color directly on the color wheel or by entering the color value. In addition to displaying colors before and after adjustment, the adjustment color list (p.8) shows overlapped range of effect of adjusted colors, and has a checkbox for specifying whether applying adjusted colors or not.
Introduction Color Display Mode Adjusting the Gamma Characteristic for Luminosity You can select the color display mode which will be the basis for color adjustment from three options (HSL, Lab, or RGB) as well as checking values for adjusted colors. Switches the color display mode You can adjust the brightness and contrast for the luminosity of the entire image using the tone curve.
Saving the Adjustments as a Picture Style File Adjustments specified in the [Tool palette] (p.10 to p.17) are saved on your computer as an original Picture Style file (extension “.PF2” or “.PF3”). The adjustments are saved as a Picture Style file which is separate from the sample image, and the sample image used to perform the adjustments is not affected at all. Introduction Contents 1 Click the [ ] button. the file name and save destination and then 2 Specify click the [Save] button.
Using a Picture Style File Saved Picture Style files can be registered in the camera and applied to shot images. They can also be applied to RAW images using DPP. Registering a Picture Style File to the Camera Picture Style files saved on your computer can be registered to the “Camera that has a Picture Style function settings” (For information on whether your camera is equipped with the Picture Style function, refer to the camera’s Instruction Manual.) using EOS Utility and applied to shot images.
Preferences You can perform color management settings such as specifying the work color space for the sample image displayed in the main window, or setting the profile for the monitor. Exiting PSE Introduction In the main window, select the [File] menu [Exit]. PSE exits. Contents 1 Select the [Tools] menu [Preferences]. the required settings and then click the [OK] 2 Specify button. The [Preferences] window appears.
Reference Troubleshooting If PSE is not operating correctly, refer to the items below. Installation could not be completed correctly Select an administrator-level privilege ([Computer administrator], [Administrator], etc.) as a user setting. You cannot install the software if a user setting other than an administrator-level privilege is selected. For detailed information on selecting an administrator-level privilege, refer to your computer user’s manual.
About This Instruction Manual It is prohibited to reproduce, in whole or part, the contents of this Instruction Manual without permission. Canon may change without notice the software specifications and contents of this Instruction Manual. The software screens and displays printed in this Instruction Manual may differ slightly from the actual software. Please note that irrespective of the above-mentioned, Canon does not take responsibility for the outcome of the operation of the software.
Supplemental Information CPX-E508-000 © CANON INC.
System Map 270EX II EL-100 430EX III-RT/ 470EX-AI 600EX II-RT Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II 430EX III ST-E3-RT Macro Twin Lite MT-26EX-RT Bundled Accessories ST-E2*1 Strap Cable protector Hand Strap E2 Protecting Cloth PC-E1 AC Adapter DC Coupler USB Power Adapter AC-E6N*3 DR-E6*3 PD-E1*4 *1: *2: *3: *4: 2 Battery Pack LP-E6N*2 Battery Grip BG-E22 Battery Charger LC-E6 Car Battery Cable CB-570 Car Battery Charger CBC-E6 No AF-assist beam from Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2.
System Map Headphones GPS Receiver Directional Stereo GP-E2*5 Microphone DM-E1 RF lenses EF lenses EF-S lenses Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 Mount Adapter Remote Controller Adapter RA-E3 HDMI Cable HTC-100 (Approx. 2.9 m/9.5 ft.) TV/Monitor Interface Cable IFC-100U (Approx. 1 m/3.2 ft.) Wireless File Transmitter Wireless Remote WFT-E7 (Ver.2)*6/ Remote Control Switch WFT-E7*6 BR-E1 RS-60E3 Wireless LAN adapter Interface Cable IFC-400U (Approx. 4 m/13.1 ft.
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Still Photo Shooting o: Set automatically k: User selectable Function A t RAW k k Image quality JPEG k k Dual Pixel RAW k k Cropping/aspect ratio k Automatically set/Auto o k ISO speed Manually set k Auto o k Picture Style Manual selection k Auto o k Preset k White Custom k balance Color temperature setting k Correction/Bracketing k Auto Lighting Optimizer o k High ISO speed noise reduction o k Long exposure noise reduction k Highlight tone priority k Peripheral
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Function Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous Drive shooting Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control Self-timer: 2 sec.
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Movie Recording o: Set automatically k: User selectable y k t v M 4K k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k Movie recording quality Full HD HD 24.
Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Function Movie servo AF AF method AF Touch & drag AF Manual focusing (MF) y k t v M k o k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k k o 1 k* 2 k* MF peaking Focus guide Metering k o Exposure compensation Exposure AE lock Auto slow shutter Time code HDMI output o k k Canon Log k k k k k *1: With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation. *2: With ISO Auto, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
Specifications Type Type: Digital single-lens non-reflex AF/AE camera Recording media: SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card * UHS-II and UHS-I cards supported. Image sensor size: Approx. 36.0x24.0 mm Compatible lenses: Canon RF and EF lens product groups * EF/EF-S lenses supported with a mount adapter attached (EF-M lenses not supported) Effective angle of view: With RF/EF lenses: Approximately equivalent to the indicated focal length With EF-S lenses: Approx. 1.
Specifications File name: Preset code, User setting 1, User setting 2 File numbering: Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset Image Processing During Shooting Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1–3 White balance: Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature setting (approx.
Specifications [Still photo shooting] AF operation: One-Shot AF, Servo AF Auto AF operation switching: In Scene Intelligent Auto mode; can be set from a menu Eye Detection AF: Available Continuous AF: Available AF area: Horizontal: Approx. 88%, Vertical: Approx. 100% Horizontal: Approx. 80%, Vertical: Approx.
Specifications Exposure Control Metering mode: Real-time metering using the image sensor 384-zone (24x16) metering Still photo shooting: • Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points) • Partial metering (approx. 6.1% of screen, at center) • Spot metering (approx. 2.
Specifications ISO speed: (recommended exposure index) Still photo shooting: Scene Intelligent Auto: Automatically set within ISO 100–12800 Fv/P/Tv/Av/M/BULB: ISO Auto, manually set within ISO 100–40000 (in 1/3- or 1-stop increments), expandable to L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) * With highlight tone priority set, the minimum limit will be ISO 200.
Specifications AE lock: Still photo shooting: Auto: AE lock when focus is achieved can be enabled or disabled for each metering mode with a Custom Function Manual: With AE lock button Movie recording: With AE lock button Flicker reduction: Available in still photo shooting Bulb timer: Bulb exposure time settable HDR shooting: Dynamic range adjustment: Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3 Effects: Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed Auto image alignment: Available Multiple exposures: Shooting opti
Specifications Drive System Drive mode: Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting, Lowspeed continuous shooting, Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control, Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control Continuous shooting speed: High-speed continuous shooting: Max. approx. 8.0 shots/ sec. * Lower continuous shooting speed when reducing flicker, when set to Dual Pixel RAW or Servo AF, or during flash photography.
Specifications External Speedlite Compatible Speedlites: EL/EX series Speedlites Flash metering: E-TTL II autoflash Automatic firing: Available with Speedlites equipped with this feature Safety FE: Available Flash exposure compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments FE lock: Available Continuous shooting priority mode: Available with Speedlites equipped with this feature PC terminal: Not provided Flash control: Flash function settings, Flash Custom Function settings Movie
Specifications Bit rate/Card performance 4K (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/For editing (ALL-I) requirements: :Approx. 480 Mbps/UHS-II, Video Speed Class 60 or higher (writing/reading speed) 4K (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/Standard (IPB) : Approx. 120 Mbps/UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/For editing (ALL-I) : Approx. 180 Mbps/UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/Standard (IPB) : Approx. 60 Mbps/SD Speed Class 10 or higher Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.
Specifications Screen Type: TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor Screen size and dots: Approx. 8.01 cm (3.15 in.) (3:2) with approx. 2.1 million dots Field of view (coverage): Still photo shooting: Approx. 100% vertically/horizontally (when set to JPEG Large) Movie recording: Approx. 100% vertically/horizontally Angular adjustment: Opening: Approx. 0–175° Rotation: Approx. 0–90° forward, approx.
Specifications Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink AF point display: Available Grid display: 3 types Magnified view: Approx. 1.
Specifications Interface Digital terminal: SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.1 Gen 1) equivalent, USB Type-C Computer communication, charging with USB Power Adapter PD-E1 HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (auto switching of resolution) External microphone IN terminal: 3.
Specifications Power Battery: Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1 * AC power usable with household power outlet accessories. * USB Power Adapter PD-E1 enables in-camera charging of LP-E6N. Battery information: Power source, Battery level, Shutter count, Recharge performance, Battery registration possible Number of possible shots: Approx. 370 shots at room temperature (+23°C/73°F), approx.
EOS R SYSTEM MOUNT ADAPTERS BATTERY GRIP Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Control Ring Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Drop-in Filter Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Battery Grip BG-E22 Lightweight and compact, the Mount Adapter EF-EOS R connects EF and EF-S lenses to the EOS R camera, exponentially expanding the list of compatible lenses. The Control Ring Mount Adapter EF-EOS R allows use of EF and EF-S lenses, while adding a control ring similar to those found on RF lenses for customizable control with no compromise.
REIMAGINE OPTICAL EXCELLENCE Introducing the next evolution of EOS. It’s a whole new system with a new, game-changing RF lens mount that delivers optical excellence today and incredible possibilities for future designs. The new full-frame mirrorless EOS R camera provides gorgeous results, with four RF lenses reimagining Canon optics and three optional Mount Adapters helping to ensure you can bring your EF and EF-S lenses along.
EOS R SYSTEM MOUNT ADAPTERS BATTERY GRIP Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Control Ring Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Drop-in Filter Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Battery Grip BG-E22 Lightweight and compact, the Mount Adapter EF-EOS R connects EF and EF-S lenses to the EOS R camera, exponentially expanding the list of compatible lenses. The Control Ring Mount Adapter EF-EOS R allows use of EF and EF-S lenses, while adding a control ring similar to those found on RF lenses for customizable control with no compromise.
Canon EOSRSYSTEM WHITE PAPER --------- -- .. IL_ ------~--~- A New Lens-Camera System Written by Larry Thorpe, Canon U.S.A.
Content Page Abstract 1 1.0 HISTORY OF THE EOS SYSTEM 1 2.0 EOS SYSTEM EXTENDS TO DIGITAL CINEMA 2 3.0 LIMITATIONS OF THE CURRENT EOS SYSTEM 4 4.0 A CHANGING GLOBAL MARKETPLACE 4 5.0 AN IDEAL LENS CAMERA SYSTEM 5 6.0 EXTENDING LENS DESIGN OPTIONS 5 7.0 KEY TO A NEW GENERATION OF LENSES — NEW LENS MOUNT 7 8.0 DETAILS OF THE NEW CANON RF MOUNT 8 9.0 CHALLENGE OF MANAGING LENS ABERRATIONS 10 10.0 NEW CONCEPTS UNDERLYING RF LENSES 12 10.1 New Feature Unique to RF Lenses 10.1.
Abstract The Canon EOS system is comprised of EF lenses, EF-S lenses, and associated cameras. This system is now thirty years old. It remains robust and innovative. These interchangeable lens-cameras systems service multiple levels of the global imaging marketplace — from the highest professional levels to the aspiring new photographers within the larger consumer base.
All operational functions were supported by the electrical communication between the lens and camera. This communication allowed focusing motors to be optimally positioned within each individual lens design, which supported fast auto focus systems. The aperture control was also electronic which supported auto-aperture functionalities.
Figure 2 The global production communities freely “mix ‘n match” lenses and cameras In 2011 Canon leveraged the vast accumulation of experiences in the broadcast television optics business and that of the now firmly established Canon EOS system to enter the digital cinema world with a family of high-end professional digital cinema lenses (both primes and zooms) and cameras — the Canon Cinema EOS system.
3.0 LIMITATIONS OF THE CURRENT EOS SYSTEM Assessing the current EOS system in the context of future considerations exposes some limitations as follows: 1. Insufficient flexibilities in mount diameter and back focus distance to accommodate all of the increasingly diverse requirements in zoom and prime lenses 2. Limited speed of the electronic communication between lens and camera 3. Limited electronic channels between lens and camera to accommodate new operational aspirations 4.
5.0 AN IDEAL LENS-CAMERA SYSTEM Three decades after the debut of the Canon EOS system Canon believes that new and broadening marketplace dynamics require an extension to the original design premise of the EF interchangeable lens-camera system. An ideal lens-camera system intended for future years in imaging would include the following contemporary considerations: 1. Emerging popularity of the full frame image sensor 2. Anticipated progressive elevation of sensor resolution 3.
In that context, seeking the ideal lens for a given shooting application must envisage broadening flexibilities in optical and system developments according to the following: 1. Higher Optical Performance — to accommodate multiple future enhancements in camera performance 2. Increased optical speed — for specific lenses 3. Enhanced Operational Specifications — such as focal length ranges, maximum aperture, and their controls 4.
7.0 KEY TO NEW LENS GENERATION — NEW LENS MOUNT Central to the effective implementation of the strategy to extend the potential of the EOS system for the future is a new lens mount. Canon has developed a mount that holds high promise of sustaining far more flexible lens designs over the long term — the new RF mount. Figure 6 The new lens mount is designed to empower new flexibilities in lens design and a new generation of mirrorless cameras Considerations that guided the new lens mount design: 1.
8.0 DETAILS OF THE NEW CANON RF MOUNT Figure 7 Showing new RF mount (on the right) side by side with the existing EF mount (on the left) RF mount is a new mount that maintains the advantages of a fully electronic large-diameter EF mounts while additionally offering an optimal diameter, flange back, and back focus to more fully capitalize on optical characteristics of a full-frame mirrorless systems. Like the EF mount, a 3-tab bayonet mount is used in the RF mount.
The reduction from a 44mm flange back distance in the EF mount system to the 20 mm of the new RF mount system opens important additional degrees of freedom in lens designs. The pivotal innovation offered by this short distance, combined with the large 54 mm diameter RF mount — is the freedom to deploy large diameter optical elements at the very rear of the lens and closer to the large image sensor. This adds new optimization capabilities to the lens-camera imaging interface.
9.0 THE CHALLENGE OF MANAGING LENS ABERRATIONS Optical aberrations are an inescapable reality of each and every element within all lenses. The wellknown Seidel monochromatic aberrations are image defects associated with the fundamental behavior of light rays—of all wavelengths — passing through a lens element. These monochromatic aberrations include spherical aberration, coma, astigmatism, curvature of field and geometric distortion.
Two key dimensions play a significant role in the quality of the final image projected on to the image sensor — they are the back focus distance and the diameter of the final lens element. Figure 9 is a simplistic illustration of their cumulative effect on the angle of the ray bundle landing on the extremities of the image sensor. The colored circles identify ray bundles affecting image performance in the image central zone (red) and in the image extremities (blue).
10.0 10.1 NEW CONCEPTS UNDERLYING RF LENSES New Feature Unique to RF Lenses The new RF lenses represent a quite radical step forward in lens designs that anticipate the future imaging needs of an increasingly sophisticated end user. 10.1.1 Control Ring A significant new innovation is incorporated into the design of these lenses — a special knurled control ring, which in the initial RF lens embodiments is positioned at the very front of the lens — before the focusing control ring, as shown in Figure 11.
10.1.3 Focus Ring Rotation Direction Change The RF lenses all incorporate an ability to choose the direction of rotation of the manual focus control. In place of a direct mechanical connection from focus control ring to the actual focusing optics, through a threaded, all mechanical helicoid, the system uses a focus ring connected to a series of many very fine, electronic contacts. There's no direct, mechanical connection at all to the group(s) of elements that move the focusing element.
11.1 RF28-70mm F2 L USM RF28-70 F2 L USM is a large-diameter, standard L zoom lens with a bright F2.0 constant aperture across the entire zoom range — the new 28-70mm F2. The lens is intended for professional photographers, high-end amateurs, and low-light moviemaking. It embodies high-speed auto focus functionality, and a Control Ring for functional assignment of exposure controls. Figure 12 The new RF28-70 F2 L USM — a compact 28-70mm F2.
The new RF mount made possible a zoom lens having an ultra-large dimeter and a constant F2.0 aperture across the entire zoom range. The F2.0 maximum aperture creates an excellent creative bokeh. Figure 14 Showing the operational controls on the RF28-70mm F2 L USM lens This remarkable zoom lens is represents a significant step forward in terms of the F2.0 constant aperture, generous zoom range, and a size and weight that would not have been possible in an EF lens. It is ideal for handheld shooting.
11.1.1 MTF Characteristics of the RF28-70mm F2 L USM Lens The MTF curves in Figure 15 show the behavior of this lens measured at four distances from the image center. Two spatial frequencies are used — one, at the low 10 line pairs per millimeter (LP/mm) which is an important measure of the contrast of the lens, and the second is at a higher 30 LP/mm which indicates resolving power. Two separate measurements are made for each at right angles to each other.
11.1.2 MTF of RF28-70mm F2 L USM and Equivalent EF Zooms Figure 16 shows the MTF curves for the new EF28-70mm F2 L USM on the right compared with those of two established EF zoom lenses — with all three lenses set at maximum aperture. Of special note are the following: 1. 10 Lp/mm Sagittal of the new F2 lens is very close to that of the EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM lens (slightly better at maximum image height) and is much higher than the EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM lens at max height 2.
Figure 17 shows the MTF curves for the telephoto end of all three zoom lenses. 1. 10 Lp/mm Sagittal is slightly higher than both EF lenses at the far corners of the image 2. 10 Lp/mm Meridional is essentially equivalent to that of the EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM but is higher than that of EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM 3. 30 Lp/mm Sagittal is higher than both EF lenses at the 22 mm height 4. 30 Lp/mm Meridional is essentially equivalent to that of the EF24-70mm f/2.
11.2 RF50mm F1.2 L USM This is a large diameter standard single-focus lens employing the new standard RF mount. At its maximum aperture of F1.2 the lens maintains high sharpness at image center with well controlled falloff of MTF toward the image extremities. The lens is designed to extend the creative photo expressiveness for professional photographers and high-end amateurs. Figure 18 The new RF50mm F1.
The lens deploys three high-refraction aspheric elements — shown in green in Figure 19. Chromatic aberrations are minimized using the UD element (dark green). Flare and ghosting are particularly well controlled using Canon’s Super Spectra Coatings — with the Air Sphere Coating (ASC) technology on one critically positioned lens element shown in Figure 19.
11.2.1 MTF Characteristics of the RF50mm F1.2 L USM lens compared to EF Lenses Figure 21 shows the MTF characteristics of the RF50mm F1.2 L USM lens at the maximum relative aperture setting of F1.2. Figure 21 The 10 and 30 Lp/mm MTF curves for RF50mm F1.2 L USM Figure 22 Comparing the MTF characteristics of the RF50mm F1.
1. 10 Lp/mm Sagittal of the RF50mm F1.2 L USM lens maintains a significantly higher MTF across the total image height compared to both EF lenses (and especially compared to the EF50mm f/1.2L USM) 2. 10 Lp/mm Meridional exhibits an excellent MTF characteristic compared to both EF lenses 3. 30 Lp/mm Sagittal exhibits a higher and more controlled MTF across the total image height than the two EF lenses 4. 11.3 30 Lp/mm Meridional curve for RF50mm F1.
Figure 24 Showing the fourteen groups made up of a total of eighteen lens elements in the RF24105mm F4 L IS USM lens Strategic disposition of three aspheric lens elements (shown in light green in Figure 24 helps correct for astigmatism, spherical aberration, and geometric distortion. The UD lens element shown in dark green helps minimize both lateral and longitudinal chromatic aberrations.
Because the focusing element (“focus lens” in Figure 24 above) is small and lightweight the focusing actuator deploys a Nano USM (new Thin-type). This motor uses the basic Ultrasonic principle, of extremely controlled, fine vibrations produced by running current through a specific metal device. In this case, the "device" looks almost like a tiny metal bandage, with little projecting nubs on either side — Figure 26.
Figure 28 shows the MTF curves for the new RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM on the left compared with those of two established EF zoom lenses — for the wide end of their respective zoom ranges. Of special note are the following: 1. 10 Lp/mm Sagittal is slightly lower than that of the EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM lens except at the extreme corners of the image 2.
Figure 29 shows the MTF curves for the new RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM on the left compared with those of two established EF zoom lenses — for the wide end of their respective zoom ranges. Of special note are the following: 1. 10 Lp/mm Sagittal for RF24-105 F4 L IS USM is slightly lower across the image height than that of the EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM except at maximum image height 2.
11.4 RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM is a wide angle macro lens employing the new standard RF mount having a maximum aperture of F1.8 and a 0.5x magnification. It has a minimum aperture of F22. This is a moderate wide-angle lens with a compact overall design, ideally suited to traditional candid street photography and low-light imaging. It combines beautifully with the smaller mirrorless camera as a lightweight, travel and location oriented lens for serious enthusiasts.
The lens has the new control ring — with 54 clicks per revolution. It has a high performing optical image stabilization system with shake-correction allowing hand-holding at shutter speeds up to 5-Stops slower than would normally be possible — impressive for a lens having a brightness of F1.8. In two key areas a notable improvement was implemented in this new 35 mm lens compared to the well-known EF35mm f/2 IS USM lens. The overall length of the lens’s optical path is shortened from 105 mm to 80.
Figure 33 Figure 34 EF lenses MTF curves for RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM lens MTF characteristics of the new RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM lens compared to two 35mm The new RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM has remarkably similar MTF characteristics to those of the excellent EF35mm f/1.4L lens. But it is a more compact and lightweight lens and has a macro shooting capability at f/1.8 brightness that cannot be matched by any EF lens.
1. 10 Lp/mm Sagittal for the new RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM lens maintains a slightly higher MTF across the total image height compared to the EF35mm f/2 IS USM and is much lower than that of the EF35mm f/1.4L II USM 2. 10 Lp/mm Meridional exhibits a lower MTF than both EF 35mm lenses 3. 30 Lp/mm Sagittal for the RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM is somewhat similar to that of the EF35mm f/2 IS USM out to 15mm height but slightly higher at maximum image height but is not as well controlled as the EF35mm f/1.
12.1 Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Figure 35 12.
12.3 Drop-In Filter Mount Adapter EF-EOS R Figure 37 Drop-In Filter Mount Adapter EF-EOS R showing the various options for the drop-in optical filters 13.0 EOS R LENS-CAMERA SYSTEM The EOS R system incorporates a variety of operational empowerments that have been made possible because of new innovation in the new lens series and the high-speed electronic communication between the lens and the camera. 13.
In the new EOS R system the lens embodies new technologies that combine with the IS system in the camera to implement an augmented control over the image blurring that can be caused by shaking and vibration of the lens-camera system. This is empowered by an interactive data communication between the two. Within the lens a dual gyro sensor system detects any inadvertent physical movements of the system and this data is reported across lens-camera communication to the DIGIC 8 processor.
13.2 Digital Lens Optimizer (DLO) System The Digital Lens Optimizing system is built into the EOS R camera and is intended to implement realtime corrections for a number of optical aberrations and distortions encountered over a wide range of shooting conditions. Before the light rays reach the CMOS image sensor they pass through the multielement lens and various filters as illustrated in Figure 40.
Figure 42 Showing the stored data files on lens aberrations and the real-time lens operational controls communication across to the DLO engine within the EOS R camera The DLO system can implement corrections for the following 1. Resolution loss due to cumulative aberrations 2. Resolution loss due to diffraction 3.
In the EOS R system, Digital Lens Optimizer can be applied in-camera when the RAW files are converted to JPEG image files, and users can expect improvements in fine detail and resolution, especially with subjects having lots of inherent detail (think grass and foliage in landscapes, textures in fashion fabrics, etc.). If RAW images are recorded and then processed in Canon’s Digital Photo Professional software, similar benefits can be applied in processing the images. 13.
Figure 44 Showing the separate processing of the dual pixel data from the image sensor — for video and for Auto Focus — at the entry stage of the Digic 8 processor Figure 44 illustrates the manner in which the sets of dual pixel outputs from the CMOS image sensor are sent to the DIGIC 8 processing microcircuit that was developed by Canon.
It can range across the image plane according to the discrete manually “Selectable AF Points” outlined in Figure 45. There are 87 positions horizontally (covering 88% of the image width) and 65 positions vertically (covering 100% of the image height) for these selectable AF points. This ensures very precise auto focus operation.
13.4 Comparison of EOS R Lens-Camera System with EF Lens and DSLR A sense of the significant compactness that the EOS R camera system can offer is shown in the outline drawing of Figure 46 which compares it to the Canon EOS 5D Mark IV.
A more dramatic illustration is shown in Figure 47 — which effectively conveys how the new lens and mount have very effectively shortened the overall length of the lens-camera system.
14.0 SUMMARY The EOS system is hugely established across the globe and continues to move in new directions — as the lines between still and motion imaging blur and as lens-camera image quality steadily increases with every generation. Applications of still and motion imaging have seen extraordinary advances at all levels — from amateur all the way to the highest professionals.
Register Now! Visit www.registercanon.com to register your new EF & EF-S Lenses today and receive the following: I • Telephone support* • E-mail support* • Product protection* • Receive information on new products and promotions* There is no charge to register or for the benefits offered. * These benefits valid in the U.S. only. Please read the Terms and Conditions at www.registercanon.com for complete details. canon For accessories and other supplies visit www.estore.usa.canon.
on Ca..... l ■■ iD.ealer Record of Canon Purchase Fiche d'Achat our Coric. · nrnaire Canon __ _ _ I I _ 11 111 II Complete this card at time of sale.
Cauon CANON® EF Lens and Accessories Limited WarrantyFor U.S.A. & Canada Only The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U.S.A., Inc. (Canon U.S.A.) in the United States or Canon Canada, Inc. (Canon Canada) in Canada with respect to the Canon brand EF Lens, as well as with respect to the accessories packaged with this limited warranty (collectively the "Products"), when purchased and used in the United States or Canada. The Products are the only Products to which this limited warranty applies.
CANON U.S.A., INC. CANON CANADA INC. NAME NOM ADDRESS ADRESSE CITY VILLE POSTAL CODE CODE POSTAL PROVINCE THESE ARE NOT REGISTRATION CARDS - Retain for your Records MODEL MODELE MOUNT ADAPTER EF-EOS R BODY NO. BOITIER NO 6802006084 CES CARTES NE SONT PAS GELLES POUR ~ENREGISTREMENT. - Les conserver comme reference.
Canon U.S.A. You may obtain technical support for your Products as follows: • Internet support at www.usa.canon.com/support (E-mail support also available) • Telephone assistance from a Canon U.S.A. Customer Care representative free of charge during regular business hours at 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666). Canon Canada You may obtain technical support for your Products as follows: • Internet support for English at www.canon.
Cauou Garantie limitee des ,objectifs EF et des accessoires de CANON® Pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada seulement a La presente garantle limitee est foumie par Canon U.S.A., Inc. (Canon U.SA) aux Etats-Unis ou Canon Canada, Inc. (Canon Canada) au Canada l'egard des objectifs EF de marque Canon, des accessoires livres avec cette garantie limitee (collectivement les " produits ,.), lorsqu'ils sont achetes et utilises aux Etats-Unis ou au canada.
Expand Your Photographic Knowledge CANON DIGITAL LEARN I NG CENTER • Useful lessons on EOS Digital cameras, printers, software applications, ~-.... -·wireless connectivity and more • Expanded Tips & Technologies section with improved product -·- .. -----.. -. - i/ ,,_.. • and category search capabilities .' • An enhanced Explorers of Light & PrintMasters Gallery section • Improved Educational Events calendar with customizable views • Completely FREE access www.usa.canon.com/dlc ... ' . -.~ .. '\ \ /
